Ricoh Aficio MP C2030 Service Manual Download Page 110

Page: 110 / 1171

USB2.0/SD Slot Type A

D037/D038/D040/D041 2-60

2.14 USB2.0/SD SLOT TYPE A

2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No.

Description

Q’ty

1 USB2.0/SD

Slot

2 Ground

Plate

3 USB

Cable

Screw: M3 x 6 blue

Screw: M3 x 8

6 Decal

2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Connect the USB cable [B] to the USB slot [A] in the USB2.0/SD Slot unit.

2. Attach the ground plate [C] to the bracket of the USB2.0/SD Slot (

x 1: M3x6 blue).

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP C2030

Page 1: ...D037 D038 D040 D041 SERVICE MANUAL 003980MIU ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...D037 D038 D040 D041 SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...D037 D038 D040 D041 SERVICE MANUAL 003980MIU ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...SION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is inte...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Americas Corporation WARNING ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ... SAVIN D037 MP C2030 LD520CL Aficio MP C2030 C9020L D038 MP C2050 LD520C Aficio MP C2050 C9020 D040 MP C2530 LD525CL Aficio MP C2530 C9025L D041 MP C2550 LD525C Aficio MP C2550 C9025 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 10 2008 Original Printing ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...2 1 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL 2 1 2 1 3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS 2 2 2 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 2 2 2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS 2 3 2 2 1 MACHINE OPTIONS 2 3 2 2 2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2 3 2 3 COPIER INSTALLATION 2 5 2 3 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS 2 5 2 3 2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART 2 6 2 3 3 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 6 2 3 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 9 Tapes and Retainers 2 9 Developer and Toner Bottles 2 1...

Page 14: ...LLATION PROCEDURE 2 29 2 8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 2 33 2 9 SIDE TRAY D427 2 34 2 9 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 34 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 34 2 10 1 BIN TRAY UNIT D426 2 37 2 10 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 37 2 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 37 2 11 SHIFT TRAY UNIT D428 2 40 2 11 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 40 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 40 2 12 INTERNAL FINISHER D429 2 42 2 12 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 42 2 1...

Page 15: ...69 2 18 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F B829 2 71 2 18 1 INSTALLATION 2 71 User Tool Setting 2 72 2 19 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER 2 73 2 19 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 73 2 20 TRAY HEATER MAINFRAME 2 77 2 20 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 77 2 21 TRAY HEATERS OPTIONAL UNIT 2 79 2 21 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 79 Tray Heater for D425 2 79 Tray Heater for D331 2 83 2 22 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2 87 2 22 1 OVERVI...

Page 16: ...re 2 103 Recovery from a Device Problem 2 104 Restoring the Encryption key 2 104 Clearing the NVRAM 2 105 2 22 10 PICTBRIDGE 2 105 2 22 11 VM CARD TYPE I D038 D041 ONLY 2 106 Installation Procedure 2 106 Firmware Update Procedure 2 107 2 22 12 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E D038 D041 ONLY 2 108 Installation Procedure 2 108 Update Procedure 2 109 2 22 13 GIGABIT ETHERNET D038 D041 ONLY 2 110 2 22 14 MEMORY UN...

Page 17: ...TION 4 5 Image Area 4 5 Leading Edge 4 6 Side to Side 4 6 Adjustment Standard 4 6 Paper Registration Standard 4 6 Adjustment Procedure 4 6 4 3 4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT 4 6 4 3 5 COLOR REGISTRATION 4 7 Line Position Adjustment 4 7 4 3 6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION 4 8 Copy Mode 4 8 Printer Mode 4 13 4 4 EXTERIOR COVERS 4 15 4 4 1 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE 4 15 4 4 2 FRONT DOOR 4 15 4 4 3 ITB CLEAN...

Page 18: ...ANNER MOTOR 4 30 4 5 5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU 4 31 When reassembling 4 32 4 5 6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER 4 32 4 5 7 SCANNER HP SENSOR 4 32 4 5 8 PLATEN COVER SENSOR 4 33 4 5 9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE 4 34 Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire 4 36 4 5 10 REAR SCANNER WIRE 4 38 Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire 4 38 4 6 LASER OPTICS 4 40 4 6 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION 4 40 4 6 2 LASER UNIT 4 40 Preparing a ...

Page 19: ...8 4 8 2 ITB TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR 4 58 4 8 3 ITB IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT 4 59 4 8 4 ITB UNIT MOTOR 4 60 4 8 5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT 4 60 When reinstalling a new image transfer belt 4 64 4 8 6 ITB CONTACT MOTOR 4 64 4 8 7 ITB CONTACT SENSOR 4 65 4 9 PAPER TRANSFER 4 67 4 9 1 PTR PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT 4 67 4 9 2 OPENING THE PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 4 68 4 9 3 ID SENSOR BOARD 4 68 Cleani...

Page 20: ...ON ROLLER 4 90 When reinstalling the fusing roller 4 91 4 11 10 PRESSURE ROLLER 4 91 Cleaning Requirement 4 93 4 11 11 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTATS 4 93 4 11 12 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR 4 93 Cleaning Requirement 4 94 4 11 13 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR 4 94 Pressure Roller Thermistor Center 4 94 Pressure Roller Thermistor Center 4 95 Cleaning Requirement 4 96 4 11 14 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT 4 96 ...

Page 21: ... paper exit sensor 4 111 4 13 5 INVERTER SENSOR 4 111 4 13 6 INVERTER MOTOR 4 112 4 13 7 FUSING FRONT FAN 4 113 When installing the fusing front fan 4 113 4 14 DUPLEX UNIT 4 114 4 14 1 DUPLEX UNIT 4 114 4 14 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 4 115 4 14 3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 4 116 4 14 4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR 4 117 4 14 5 DUPLEX EXIT MOTOR 4 118 4 14 6 BY PASS MOTOR 4 119 4 14 7 BY PASS TRAY UNIT 4 120 4 14 ...

Page 22: ... new controller board 4 135 When installing a new HDD unit 4 135 Disposal of HDD Units 4 136 Reinstallation 4 136 4 15 12 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 4 136 NVRAM on the BCU 4 136 NVRAM on the Controller 4 137 4 16 MACHINE BOOT UP 4 138 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE 5 1 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 5 1 1 SP TABLES 5 1 5 1 2 TYPES OF SP MODES FOR DI C1 H MODEL D038 D041...

Page 23: ...5 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS 5 14 Error Message Table 5 14 5 3 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE 5 16 5 4 REBOOT SYSTEM SETTING RESET 5 19 5 4 1 SOFTWARE RESET 5 19 5 4 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET 5 19 System Setting Reset 5 19 Copier Setting Reset 5 19 5 5 CONTROLLER SELF DIAGNOSTICS 5 21 5 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 21 5 6 SD CARD APPLI MOVE 5 22 5 6 1 OVERVIEW 5 22 5 6 2 MOVE EXEC 5 23 5 6 3 UN...

Page 24: ... 11 3 ERROR MESSAGES 5 41 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 6 1 6 2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 6 2 6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6 3 6 3 1 SUB SCAN MAGNIFICATION ERROR 6 3 Sub scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure 6 3 Motor Speed Adjustment 6 4 6 3 2 TRAPEZOID IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 6 6 Before Adjusting the Trapezoid Image 6 6 Adjusting the Trapezoid Image 6 7 6 4 JAM...

Page 25: ... D366 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 SEE SECTION D388 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D425 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 SEE SECTION D425 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D426 1 BIN TRAY BN3060 SEE SECTION D426 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D427 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 SEE SECTION D427 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 SEE SECTION D428 FOR DETAILED ...

Page 26: ...D037 D038 D040 D041 xiv SM D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 SEE SECTION D429 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D432 D433 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550 C2530 SEE SECTION D432 D433 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 27: ...upplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine Before Installation Maintenance Shipping and Moving the Machine Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine If the machine is heavy two or more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries muscle strains spinal injuries etc or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over Personnel moving or working around the ma...

Page 28: ...hipping materials protective materials wires and tags metal brackets etc removed for installation have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal operation Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise Never use your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating...

Page 29: ...and becoming nauseous Switch the machine off unplug it and allow it to cool before doing preventive maintenance To avoid fire or explosion never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to contamination of food drinks etc which could cause illness Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone...

Page 30: ...d for cuts or other damage Replace the power cord if necessary A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply Make sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg Coiling the power cord can cause excessive...

Page 31: ... minor problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the machine Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety inst...

Page 32: ...cartridges or toner bottles including empty toner bottles or cartridges in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an open flame Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages cartridges and bottles including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges out of the reach of children Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges ...

Page 33: ...ouching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols Health Safety Conditions 1 Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals 3 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by ac...

Page 34: ...Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore dire...

Page 35: ...s of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only...

Page 36: ......

Page 37: ...ONDITIONS D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE APPENDIX PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE APPENDIX JAM DETECTION D426 1 BIN TRAY BN3060 D427 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 APPENDIX ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS APPENDIX SP MODE TABLES D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITI...

Page 38: ......

Page 39: ...PRODUCT INFORMATION SECTION 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 3 04 15 2009 Machine Configuration ...

Page 40: ......

Page 41: ...41 Product Information 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS See Appendices for the following information Mainframe Specifications Printer Specifications Scanner Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Software Accessories Optional Equipment ...

Page 42: ...odel This is a light model Expansion functions and options are limited H Model This is a high grade model Various expansion functions and options can be used 1 2 1 H MODEL Item Machine Code Call out Remarks Mainframe D038 D041 1 D038 D041 Platen cover G329 2 ARDF D366 3 One from the two 3 is standard Side tray D427 4 ...

Page 43: ...nch unit 4 holes D390 31 8 Requires 9 Two tray paper feed unit D331 5 One tray paper feed unit D425 6 Caster Table D448 7 One from 5 6 and 7 The one tray PFU 6 requires 7 If neither 5 nor 6 is installed install 7 if required by the customer Item Machine code Remark USB2 0 SD Slot D422 Fax Option D432 Memory Unit Type B G578 SAF memory Requires the Fax Option Hand Set B433 For NA model only Require...

Page 44: ... Unit B829 Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 Key Counter Bracket A674 Memory Unit Type I D435 01 For printer function Printer Enhanced Option D435 03 04 05 PostScript 3 D435 09 10 11 Data Overwrite Security Unit D362 PictBridge M344 You can only install one of these in SD slot 1 at a time VM Card D430 01 02 03 Browser Unit D430 05 06 07 HDD Encryption Unit D377 16 In SD card slot 2 ...

Page 45: ...7 D040 1 D037 D040 Platen cover G329 2 ARDF D366 3 One from the two 3 is standard for NA and EU Side tray D427 4 1 bin tray D426 8 Two tray paper feed unit D331 5 One tray paper feed unit D425 6 Caster Table D448 7 One from 5 6 and 7 The one tray PFU 6 requires 7 If neither 5 nor 6 is installed install 7 if required by the customer ...

Page 46: ...e code Remark Fax Option D433 Hand Set B433 For NA model only Requires the Fax Option Copy Data Security Unit B829 Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 Printer Enhanced Option D435 03 04 05 PictBridge M344 You can only install one of these in SD slot 1 at a time ...

Page 47: ...Overview SM 1 7 D037 D038 D040 D041 Product Information 1 3 OVERVIEW For Overview information see Appendices ...

Page 48: ......

Page 49: ...REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 3 4 02 11 2009 Options 98 101 02 10 2009 Controller Options 106 02 11 2009 VM Card 108 109 02 11 2009 Browser Unit 108 110 6 13 2011 Browser Unit 108 109 10 13 2011 Important note Browser Unit ...

Page 50: ......

Page 51: ...on or more 5 Do not let the machine get exposed to the following 1 Cool air from an air conditioner 2 Heat from a heater 6 Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas 7 Install the machine at locations lower than 2 500 m 8 200 ft above sea level 8 Install the machine on a strong level base Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm 9 Do not install the machine in a...

Page 52: ... well ventilated room A Over 100 mm 3 9 B Over 100 mm 3 9 C Over 100 mm 3 9 D Over 100 mm 3 9 Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above 2 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Insert the plug firmly in the outlet Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord Ground the machine 1 Input voltage level 120 V 60 Hz More than 12 A 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz More than 8 A 2 Permissible voltage ...

Page 53: ...ter table Caster table One from No 1 or No 2 No 2 requires No 3 4 Platen cover Platen cover 5 ARDF ARDF Standard One from No 4 or No 5 6 1 bin tray unit 1 bin tray unit 7 Shift tray 8 Side Tray Side Tray 9 Internal finisher If No 9 is installed then No 6 and or No 7 cannot be installed 10 Punch kit 4 types No 9 required One of the types 11 Fax unit Fax unit 12 Memory Unit 32M Fax unit required Chi...

Page 54: ...6 PostScript 3 7 Printer Enhanced Option 8 PictBridge PictBridge 9 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit One of these SD card slot 1 10 HDD Encryption Unit SD card slot 2 during installation only 11 Browser Unit SD card slot 2 during installation only No 14 is required 12 VM Card SD card slot 2 No 14 is required 13 Copy Data Security Unit Copy Data Security Unit 14 Memory Unit 512M For SDK applications Requi...

Page 55: ...INSTALLATION 2 3 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets 1 ARDF Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24V 2 Finisher Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24V ...

Page 56: ...ocedure for installation 1 The shift tray should be installed first if you want to install the shift tray with the 1 bin tray at the same time 2 3 3 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of these accessories For D037 D040 No Description Q ty Destination 1 Stamp 1 17 67 2 EU Safety Sheet 1 3 WEEE 1 67 ...

Page 57: ...2 Operating Instruction Quick Reference Printer Scanner Guide 1 17 67 29 21 19 28 13 Operating Instruction Manual for This Machine 1 14 Operating Instruction Safety Information 1 67 15 CD ROM Instruction About this machine 1 16 CD ROM Instruction Troubleshooting 1 17 CD ROM Instruction Copy Document Server Reference 1 18 CD ROM Instruction Facsimile Reference 1 19 CD ROM Instruction Printer Refere...

Page 58: ...uction Quick Reference Copy Guide 1 67 29 21 19 9 Operating Instruction Quick Reference Printer Guide 1 10 Operating Instruction Quick Reference Scanner Guide 1 57 67 29 21 19 11 Operating Instruction Manual for This Machine 1 12 Operating Instruction Safety Information 1 67 13 CD ROM Instruction About this machine 1 14 CD ROM Instruction Troubleshooting 1 15 CD ROM Instruction Copy Document Serve...

Page 59: ...the tapes from the development units before you turn the main switch on The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tapes Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper tray unit at the same time Then install the machine and other options Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine You may need them in the future if you transp...

Page 60: ...e scanner unit stay in the cutout in the inner tray For the EU models the scanner unit stay cannot be inserted in the cutout on the inner tray You must bring this stay back to your depot 5 Install the inverter tray A hooks 6 Open the duplex unit A 7 Remove the sheet B of paper with a red tag ...

Page 61: ...ear stoppers B with a red tag 10 Close the duplex unit 11 Attach the handle cover A to the front side of the duplex unit Developer and Toner Bottles 1 Open the front door A and remove the PCDU toner collection bottle B 2 Remove all tapes except the tape C from the four development units and from the toner hopper units ...

Page 62: ...tape E Make sure that the all toner hopper covers are removed when removing all tapes 3 Check if the toner hopper shutter A is fully closed If the toner hopper shutter is not fully closed and the inlet B of the toner hopper unit is visible the toner bottle cannot be installed properly 4 Press the ITB lock lever A and turn it up as shown above 5 Remove the black PCDU B x 2 ...

Page 63: ...ion bottle 9 Shake each toner bottle five or six times 10 Slide the toner bottles in toner bottle cartridges then turn each one to the right clockwise 11 Close the front door Paper Trays 1 Pull each paper tray A out Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size To move the side guides first pull out the tray fully Then push down the green lock at the rear inside the tray ...

Page 64: ...model has a fax unit as a standard function Because of this the fax settings are required at machine installation Refer to steps 7 to 9 and 14 to 16 in the Fax Option D432 Installation Procedure in the Field Service Manual of the fax option manual Initialize the Developer 1 Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off 2 Plug in the machine 3 Turn the main power swit...

Page 65: ...ure the SMC report B is stored as shown above Then replace the instruction guide sheet Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract You must select one of the counter methods developments prints in accordance with the contract SP5045 001 Counting method SP No Function Default SP5 045 001 Specifies if ...

Page 66: ... before making Remote settings 1 The setting of SP5816 201 in the mainframe must be 0 2 Device ID2 SP5811 003 must be correctly programmed 6 spaces must be put between the 3 digit prefix and the following 8 digit number e g xxx______xxxxxxxx ID2 SP5811 003 and the serial number SP5811 001 must be the same e g ID2 A01______23456789 serial No A0123456789 3 The following settings must be correctly pr...

Page 67: ... 8 Other error See SP5816 208 Error Codes below this 9 Request number confirmation executing Processing Please wait 5 Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816 205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI 6 Click EXECUTE to execute the registration with SP5816 206 7 Check the registration result with SP5816 207 Value Meaning Solution Workaround 0 Succeeded 1 Requ...

Page 68: ...mpting the Inquiry or Registration 12003 Attempted registration without execution of a confirmation and no previous registration Perform Confirmation before attempting the Registration 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2 Check ID2 of the mainframe 12005 Remote communication is prohibited The device has an Embedded RC gate related problem Make sure that Remote Ser...

Page 69: ...rations for the same mainframe Check the registration condition of the mainframe 2392 Parameter error 2393 External RCG not managed 2394 Mainframe not managed 2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal 2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe Error Caused by Response from GW URL 2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No 2 3...

Page 70: ...per and tape 3 Do one of the following Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors Shrink wrap the machine tightly After you move the machine Make sure you do the Auto Color Registration as follows This optimizes color registration Do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode c SP2 111 3 Then do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode a SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during th...

Page 71: ... 3 Securing Bracket 2 2 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person...

Page 72: ... of tape 2 Set the copier A on the paper tray unit B When installing the copier be careful not to pinch the cable C 3 Remove the connector cover A rivet screw x 1 4 Connect the cable B to the copier as shown 5 Attach a securing bracket C to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M3 x 8 each 6 Re install the connector cover ...

Page 73: ...al to each handle of the trays The paper tray number and size decal sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine 10 Rotate the adjuster A until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor 11 Load paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size 12 Turn on the main switch 13 Adjust the registration for each tray Section Image Adjustment For tray 3 use SP1002 004 For tray 4 use SP1...

Page 74: ... Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed The handle and grips may be damaged The one tray paper feed unit must be installed...

Page 75: ... tray and remove all tapes and padding 3 Put the paper tray unit on the caster table D448 For details about the installation of the caster table see the Section Caster Table D488 installation procedure 4 Grasp the handle A and grips B of the machine 5 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit C Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine ...

Page 76: ...tor cover A rivet screw x 1 9 Remove tray 1 and 2 of the machine 10 Fasten the screws M4 x 10 C 11 Reinstall all trays 12 Attach the securing brackets D M4 x 10 x 1 each 13 Load paper into the paper feed unit 14 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 15 Adjust the registration for each tray Section Image Adjustment Use SP1002 004 16 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality ...

Page 77: ...D488 2 6 1 COMPONENT CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Caster Table 1 2 Pin 2 3 Step Screw 2 2 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Put the caster table on a flat place 2 Install the two pins in the screw holes Use the screw holes A and C if the mainframe is directly installed on the caster ...

Page 78: ... Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine 4 Lift the copier or one tray paper feed unit C and then install it on the caster table D 5 Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one tray paper feed unit 6 Secure the machine or one tray paper feed unit to the caster table step screw x 2 7 Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one tray paper feed unit 8 Ad...

Page 79: ...and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 ARDF 1 2 Stamp Cartridge 1 3 Knob Screw 2 4 Stud Screw 2 5 Attention Decal Top Cover 1 2 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove all tapes and shipping retainers ...

Page 80: ...ert the two stud screws A on the top of the machine 3 Mount the ARDF A by aligning the screw keyholes B of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws 4 Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine 5 Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws C ...

Page 81: ...tridge A in the ARDF B b789i104 A 7 Peel off the platen sheet A and place it on the exposure glass 8 Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet with the corner B on the exposure glass 9 Close the ARDF 10 Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached ...

Page 82: ...g in and turn on the main power switch of the machine and then check the ARDF operation 13 Make a full size copy Check that the registrations side to side and leading edge and image skew are correct If they are not adjust the registrations and image skew see Section Image Adjustment in the Replacements and Adjustments chapter ...

Page 83: ...33 D037 D038 D040 D041 Installaion 2 8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 1 Install the stud screws A x 2 on the top cover as shown 2 Position the platen cover bracket B on the heads of the stud screws and slide the platen cover C to the left ...

Page 84: ...quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Side Tray Paper Exit Unit 1 2 Side Tray 1 3 Decal Push 1 4 Decal Door Push 1 5 Screw M3x8 1 6 Tray Stopper 1 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure ...

Page 85: ...en the duplex unit A 3 Remove the right upper cover B x 2 4 Close the side tray paper exit unit A and then connect the harness B to the machine 5 Install the side tray paper exit unit x 2 removed in step 3 6 Install the side tray A 7 Lift the side tray and then install the tray stopper B x 1 M3x8 ...

Page 86: ...M 8 Attach the Push door decal A to the top front edge of the duplex unit cover 9 Close the duplex unit and then attach the Push decal A to the duplex unit cover 10 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 11 Check the side tray operation ...

Page 87: ...PONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Tray 1 2 1 Bin Tray Unit 1 3 Screw Blue M3 x 6 1 4 Screw M3 x 8 1 5 Tray Support Bar 1 2 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure ...

Page 88: ... same time install the shift tray unit first Installing the shift tray unit after the 1 bin tray unit may be difficult 1 Remove all tapes 2 Remove the inverter tray A hook 3 Open the right door B of the machine 4 Remove the front right cover C x 1 5 Remove the paper exit cover A 6 Remove the connector cover A with a small flat screwdriver ...

Page 89: ...he 1 bin tray unit A x 1 M3x6 blue x 1 9 Install the tray A with the tray support bar in the machine 10 Attach the tray support cover B x 2 M3x8 in the accessories and one screw removed in step 7 11 Reassemble the machine 12 Turn on the main power switch of the machine and check the 1 bin tray unit operation ...

Page 90: ... list No Description Q ty 1 Shift Tray Unit 1 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure If both the shift tray unit and the 1 bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time install the shift tray unit first Installing the shift tray unit after the 1 bin tray unit may be difficult 1 Remove all tapes ...

Page 91: ...n the machine and then connect the harness to the connector B on the inner rear frame If the shift tray is difficult to install in the mainframe remove the paper exit cover C first x 1 5 Install the shift tray A fully in the machine x 2 6 Reinstall the inverter tray 7 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 8 Check the shift tray unit operation ...

Page 92: ...nal finisher without installing the punch unit at the same time 2 12 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Internal Finisher 1 2 Inverter Unit 1 3 Inner Bottom Plate 1 4 Screw M3x10 3 5 Screw M3x6 11 6 Guide Rail 1 7 Inverter Cover 1 8 Left Cover 1 ...

Page 93: ...the copier power cord before starting the following procedure Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher 1 Remove all tapes from the internal finisher 2 Remove the inverter tray A 3 Open the front door B 4 Remove the lower inner cover A 5 Press the ITB lock lever B and turn it up as shown above ...

Page 94: ...4 SM 6 Remove the inner right cover C x 2 7 Open the duplex unit A and then remove the front right cover B x 1 8 Remove the following Inner tray A x 2 Left frame rear cover B x 2 Left frame cover C x 1 Paper exit cover D x 1 Inner rear cover E x 1 ...

Page 95: ...429 SM 2 45 D037 D038 D040 D041 Installaion 9 Install the inner bottom plate A x 6 10 Attach the left cover A x 2 M3x6 one screw removed in step 8 Internal Finisher Installation 1 Insert the inverter unit A in the machine ...

Page 96: ...erter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe after inserting the two joint pins x 1 M3x6 Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe Otherwise paper jams may occur between the paper exit unit and inverter unit 4 Install the guide rail A x 2 M3x6 5 Attach the inverter cover A x 3 M3x10 ...

Page 97: ... the left side of the machine 7 Insert the rear rail pins A into the frame of the machine x 1 M3x6 8 Push the internal finisher A and connect the cable B to the power socket of the machine 9 Reassemble the machine 10 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 11 Check the internal finisher operation ...

Page 98: ... following list No Description Q ty 1 Punch Unit 1 2 Output Tray Lower Cover 1 3 Drawer Connector 1 4 Bracket 1 5 Left Frame Cover 1 6 Punch Cover 1 2 13 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE If the internal finisher has not already been installed skip the Removing the Internal Finisher section and go to the Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal ...

Page 99: ...s already been installed you must remove it first Start from the Removing the Internal Finisher section Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure Removing the Internal Finisher 1 Open the front door 2 Open the right door A and then remove the front right cover B x 1 3 Disconnect the cable A from the power socket of the machine and then pull out the internal finisher B ...

Page 100: ...Punch Unit D390 D037 D038 D040 D041 2 50 SM 4 Remove the internal finisher A x 1 M3x6 5 Remove the inverter cover A x 3 M3x10 6 Remove the guide rail A x 2 M3x6 ...

Page 101: ...the inverter unit A toward the front side x 1 M3x6 8 Remove the inverter unit A from the machine Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher 1 Remove the inverter right bracket A from the inverter unit x 4 2 To remove screw B open guide plate C ...

Page 102: ...from the inverter right bracket x 2 4 Attach the inverter right bracket A to the punch unit B x 1 M3x6 5 Slide the inverter small guide A to the front side arrow direction and then remove it x 1 6 Remove all the tapes on the punch unit If all the tapes are not removed SC763 may occur ...

Page 103: ...h unit B and then secure the inverter unit with the punch unit x 4 removed in step 1 8 Attach the drawer connector A of the punch unit to the rear bracket of the inverter unit x 2 removed in step 3 9 Attach the clamp B to the rear bracket of the inverter unit Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit ...

Page 104: ...inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe after inserting two joint pins x 1 M3x6 Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe Otherwise paper jams may occur between the paper exit unit and inverter unit 4 Remove the stopper A from the guide rail and then attach with the screw holes B these screw holes must be us...

Page 105: ...1 Installaion 5 Install the guide rail A on the front edge of the inner bottom plate x 2 6 Install the punch cover A x 3 M3x6 Preparing the Internal Finisher 1 Remove the left rear cover A and the rear cover B of the internal finisher x 2 each ...

Page 106: ...he finisher 3 Connect the harnesses B to the connectors C on the main board Black harness connector to CN16 Gray harness connector to CN17 4 Reinstall the rear cover removed in step 1 x 2 Installing the Internal Finisher 1 Install the internal finisher A in the mainframe x 1 2 Remove the bracket A x 2 ...

Page 107: ...D038 D040 D041 Installaion 3 Attach the bracket A x 2 this bracket is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit 4 Remove the output tray lower cover A this cover is for the internal finisher without the punch unit x 3 ...

Page 108: ... cover A this cover is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit x 3 Note The two projections A on the output tray lower cover this plate is actually attached to the output tray lower cover must be inserted along the two guide rails B inside the output tray unit ...

Page 109: ... to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed The left side picture shows the correct result and the right side picture shows the incorrect result 6 Attach the left frame cover A x 2 7 Push the internal finisher in the mainframe 8 Connect the I F cable B of the finisher to the inlet of the mainframe ...

Page 110: ...e accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 USB2 0 SD Slot 1 2 Ground Plate 1 3 USB Cable 1 4 Screw M3 x 6 blue 1 5 Screw M3 x 8 4 6 Decal 1 2 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Connect the USB cable B to the USB slot A in the USB2 0 SD Slot unit 2 Attach the ground plate C to the bracket of the USB2 0 SD Slot x 1 M3x6 blue ...

Page 111: ...ype A SM 2 61 D037 D038 D040 D041 Installaion 3 Remove the screw A first and the rear cover B x 7 4 Remove the scanner left cover A x 2 5 Remove the left frame cover B x 2 6 Remove the part A on the scanner left cover ...

Page 112: ...left cover with a screwdriver as shown A Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown B 8 Route the USB cable A through the gaps in the left scanner cover 9 Secure the USB2 0 SD Slot B with the left scanner cover as shown above x 4 M3x8 Use the screw holes C as shown above ...

Page 113: ...nt side 11 Plug in and turn on the mainframe 12 Enter the SP mode and then change the setting of scanner SP1013 001 from 0 to 1 13 Attach the decal A to the USB2 0 SD Slot as shown above 2 14 3 TESTING THE SD CARD USB SLOT 1 Insert an SD card or USB memory device in the slot You can connect only one removable memory device at a time 1 Close the media slot cover If you leave the cover open static e...

Page 114: ...press the Clear Modes key 1 Place an original on the exposure glass 2 Press Store File 3 Press Store to Memory Device 4 Press OK 5 Press the Start key When writing is complete a confirmation message appears 1 Press Exit 2 Remove the memory device from the media slot Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process ...

Page 115: ...r in the Replacement and Adjustment section 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 3 Controller box cover Section Controller Box Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 4 Remove the cutouts A in the rear lower cover with nippers 5 Attach the mechanical counters A to the bracket B and connect the harness to each mechanical counter as shown abov...

Page 116: ...to the frame x 2 8 Connect the mechanical counter harness C to the mechanical counter D and the BCU CN218 E and route the harness as shown above x 6 9 Reassemble the machine 10 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch 11 Enter the SP mode 12 Set SP5987 001 to 1 ON 13 Exit the SP mode and then turn the machine off and on ...

Page 117: ...he same time Internal finisher D429 Handset B433 2 16 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Hold the key counter plate nuts A on the inside of the key counter bracket B and insert the key counter holder C 2 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x 2 3 Install the key counter cover D x 2 4 Rear cover Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 5 Cut off the part A of the rear cover ...

Page 118: ...et D037 D038 D040 D041 2 68 SM 6 Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover 7 Connect the key counter cable A to the connector B 8 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 119: ...ON PROCEDURE 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 3 Cut off the part A of the rear cover 4 Attach the clamp A to the DRB bracket 5 Install the key counter interface board B on the DRB bracket x 4 ...

Page 120: ... key counter interface board as shown above ground screw x 1 x 6 7 Connect and route the harness B to the connector on the key counter interface board and connector CN216 C on the BCU x 5 8 Pull the key counter cable through from the cutout and connect it to the connector A of the key counter unit 9 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 121: ...UNIT TYPE F B829 2 18 1 INSTALLATION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Remove the rear lower cover A of the machine x 5 2 Remove the rear cover B of the machine x 7 3 Scanner cable bracket A x 4 4 Loosen the eight screws and slide up the controller box cover B ...

Page 122: ...ation The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB 3 removed and the Data Security for Copying feature set to ON When you remove this option from the machine first set the setting to OFF with the user tool before removing this board If you forget to do this Data Security for Copying feature cannot appear in the user tool setting And then SC165 will appear every ...

Page 123: ...2 19 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER 2 19 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This heater is supplied as a spare part 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 2 Open the ARDF or platen cover 3 Glass cover A stepped screw x 4 4 Scanner right cover A x 2 ...

Page 124: ...RDF exposure glass A Position the white marker B at the rear left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass 6 Rear scale A stepped screw x 3 7 Exposure glass A with left scale Position the marker at the front left corner when you reattach the exposure ...

Page 125: ...the connector of the heater B through the cutout C 10 Move the scanner carriage to the left side as shown above by rotating the scanner motor at the rear of the machine 11 Install the heater in the scanner unit x 1 12 Secure the cable cover A and the left side of the heater x 1 13 Attach a clamp as shown above 14 Connect the harness A of the heater to the connector B in the frame of the machine ...

Page 126: ...Anti Condensation Heater D037 D038 D040 D041 2 76 SM 15 Reassemble the machine 16 Attach the on standby decal A to the left hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 127: ... 20 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This heater is supplied as a spare part 1 Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine 2 Remove the connector cover A x 1 3 Connect the connector B of the heater to the connector of the main machine 4 Install the heater C inside the machine x 1 5 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 128: ...Tray Heater Mainframe D037 D038 D040 D041 2 78 SM 6 Attach the on standby decal A to the left hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 129: ...T 2 21 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This heater is supplied as a spare part Tray Heater for D425 1 Remove the rear connector cover A rivet screw x 1 of the mainframe 2 Disconnect the harness B 3 Remove the rear lower cover A of the mainframe x 5 4 Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit ...

Page 130: ... 2 80 SM 5 Remove the securing brackets A x 1 each and then the rear cover B of the paper feed unit x 2 6 Pass the connector A through the opening B 7 Install the tray heater C x 1 8 Connect the heater harness A of the heater to the relay harness B ...

Page 131: ...f the paper feed unit as shown above Make sure that the tube is in contact with the rear frame C 10 Route the relay harness A as shown above x 5 Make sure that the connector A is placed securely as shown above Make sure that the edge of the tube B is placed as shown above 11 Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit x 2 and securing brackets x 1 each ...

Page 132: ...ss C of the mainframe Do not connect the relay harness B to the tray heater harness of the mainframe before installing the securing bracket D Otherwise the securing bracket may pinch the relay harness 14 Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe x 5 15 Reinstall all the tray cassettes 16 Attach the on standby decal A to the left hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 133: ...emove the rear connector cover A rivet screw x 1 of the mainframe 2 Disconnect the harness B 3 Remove the rear lower cover A of the mainframe x 5 4 Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit 5 Remove the securing brackets A x 1 each and then rear cover B of the paper feed unit x 2 ...

Page 134: ... D041 2 84 SM 6 Pass the connector A through the opening B 7 Install the tray heater C x 1 8 Connect heater harness A of the heater to the relay harness B 9 Remove the harness guide A x 1 and move it in the blue arrow direction as shown above ...

Page 135: ... frame of the paper feed unit as shown above Make sure that the tube is contact with the rear frame C 11 Route the relay harness as shown above x 6 Make sure that the edge of the tube A is placed as shown above The clamp B is not used 12 Reinstall the harness guide 13 Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit x 2 and securing brackets x 1 each ...

Page 136: ...ss C of the mainframe Do not connect the relay harness B to the tray heater harness of the mainframe before installing the securing bracket D Otherwise the securing bracket may pinch the relay harness 16 Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe x 5 17 Reinstall all the tray cassettes 18 Attach the on standby decal A to the left hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 137: ...e end of this section I F Card Slots Fax slot A is used for the Fax Option I F slot B is used for one of the optional I F connections only one can be installed IEEE1284 IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth File Format Converter or Gigabit Ethernet The I F Slot B is only used for D038 D041 H Model SD Card Slots D037 D040 Slot 1 is used for one of the optional applications Printer Enhanced Option ...

Page 138: ...ove SP5 873 lets you copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card Slot 1 is used to store application programs But there are 3 possible applications PostScript 3 DOS DataOverwriteSecurity unit PictBridge You cannot run application programs from Slot 2 However you can move application programs from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure Make sure that the target SD card has ...

Page 139: ...application PictBridge DOS Unit to the SD card that stores the PostScript application Move Exec The menu Move Exec SP5 873 001 lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware...

Page 140: ...ard Slot 2 The application program is copied back into this card 3 Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec 7 Follow the messages shown on the operation panel 8 Turn the main switch off 9 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 This step assu...

Page 141: ...hine Then push it slowly into slot 1 B until you hear a click 3 Attach the slot cover A x 1 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal A to the front door 5 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 22 4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER D038 D041 ONLY Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure ...

Page 142: ... below SP No Title Setting SP5 836 001 Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 1 SP5 836 002 Panel Setting 0 5 Check the operation 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 22 5 IEEE1284 D038 D041 ONLY Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following netwo...

Page 143: ...re that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 22 6 IEEE 802 11 A G G WIRELESS LAN D038 D041 ONLY Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time IEEE 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth ...

Page 144: ...e front left of the machine 6 Attach ANT2 having a white ferrite core C to the rear right of the machine ANT1 is a transmission reception antenna and ANT2 is a reception antenna Do not attach them at the wrong places 7 Attach the clamps as shown above 8 Wire the cables and clamp them x 7 Make sure that the cables are not slack Keep them wired tightly along the covers You may have to move the machi...

Page 145: ... LAN Only the wireless LAN options show 5 Communication Mode Select either 802 11 Ad hoc Ad hoc or Infrastructure 6 SSID Setting Enter the SSID setting The setting is case sensitive 7 Channel You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 to 14 default 11 The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 8 WEP Encryption Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privac...

Page 146: ... 140 m 153 yd 5 5 Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd 10 This step has been removed because it was unnecessary SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802 11 a g g SP No Name Function 5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets t...

Page 147: ...th of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry 2 22 7 BLUETOOTH D038 D041 ONLY Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time IEEE 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover A x 2 ...

Page 148: ...k the accessories and their quantities against the table below Description Q ty 1 Data Overwrite Security SD Card Type I 1 2 Operating Instructions CD ROM 1 3 Comments Sheet 17 languages 2 Before You Begin the Procedure 1 Confirm that the DataOverwriteSecurity unit SD card is the correct type for the machine The correct type for this machine is Type I 2 Make sure that the following settings are no...

Page 149: ... were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the install 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You...

Page 150: ...h EXECUTE with SP5 878 001 8 Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch Then turn off the main power switch 9 Turn on the machine power 10 Do SP5990 005 SP print mode Diagnostic Report 11 Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area a of the diagnostic report are the same as those in area b a ROM Number Firmware Version HDD Format Option b Loading Program GW5a_zoffym Diagnostic Re...

Page 151: ...default settings Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed 2 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication On If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setti...

Page 152: ...lation 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks B when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attach...

Page 153: ...the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 B until you hear a click 3 Turn on the main power switch and then enter the SP mode 4 Select SP5878 002 and then press Execute on the LCD 5 Exit the SP mode after Completed is displayed on the LCD 6 Turn off the main power switch 7 Remove the SD card from slot 2 8 Attach the SD card slot cover A x 1 ...

Page 154: ...ey this has been printed out earlier by the user into the nvram_key txt file 5 Remove only the HDD unit Section HDD Only for D038 D041 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the encryption key in the machine 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into slot 2 10 Turn on the main po...

Page 155: ...contains nvclear into slot 2 9 Turn on the main power switch and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board 10 Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status 11 Remove the SD card from slot 2 12 Turn on the main power switch 13 Initialize the NVRAM SP5801 001 and HDD unit SP5832 001 with SP mode 14 The user must...

Page 156: ...ot cover A x 1 4 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 22 11VM CARD TYPE I D038 D041 ONLY IMPORTANT Whenever installing an SDK application on this model e g the VM Card or Browser Unit the Memory Unit Type I 512MB must also be installed Installation Procedure 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 3 Insert ...

Page 157: ...update fails All settings for the application are cleared 4 Turn the main power off then remove the SD card slot cover and remove the VM SD card from the SD card slot Updating the VM SD card 1 Insert the SD card into the SD card writer that is connected to a PC 2 Make sure which drive is assigned for the SD card 3 Decompress the downloaded update file then there are two files one file has an exe f...

Page 158: ...nged after updating 2 22 12BROWSER UNIT TYPE E D038 D041 ONLY IMPORTANT Whenever installing an SDK application on this model e g the VM Card or Browser Unit the Memory Unit Type I 512MB must also be installed Installation Procedure IMPORTANT The Browser Option can only be installed on one machine Once the installation is complete it cannot be installed on any other machine after that even if it is...

Page 159: ...f the hard keys which you want to use for the Browser Unit By default this function is assigned to the Other Functions key bottom key of the function keys 19 Touch OK 20 Touch Exit twice to go back to the copy screen 21 Turn off the main power switch 22 Install the function key for Browser Unit to the place you chose in step 18 23 Turn on the main power switch 24 When the reaches the Ready conditi...

Page 160: ... LCD 8 Touch Uninstall on the LCD 9 Touch the Browser line 10 Confirmation message appears on the LCD 11 Touch Yes to proceed 12 Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD 13 Touch Yes to uninstall the browser unit 14 You will see Uninstalling the extended feature Please wait and then Completed 15 Touch Exit to go back to the setting screen 16 Exit User Tools setting and then turn off the main powe...

Page 161: ...onnect the USB cable to the USB connector 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize this option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 22 14MEMORY UNIT TYPE I 512MB D038 D041 ONLY Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Controller box cover Section Controller Box Cover 3 HDD bracket Section HDD Only for D038 D041 4...

Page 162: ...HECK ALL CONNECTIONS 1 Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page All installed options are shown in the System Reference column ...

Page 163: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SECTION 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 164: ......

Page 165: ...ntenance Tables SM 3 1 D037 D038 D040 D041 Preventive Maintenance 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See Appendices for the following information Preventive Maintenance Items Other Yield Parts ...

Page 166: ...omatically In the case of developer the developer initialization will also be done automatically 4 Exit the SP mode Item SP Development Unit Black 3902 001 Cyan 3902 002 Magenta 3902 003 Yellow 3902 004 Drum Unit Black 3902 009 Cyan 3902 010 Magenta 3902 011 Yellow 3902 012 ITB Unit 3902 013 Fusing Unit 3902 014 Fusing Roller 3902 015 Fusing Belt 3902 016 ITB Cleaning Unit 3902 017 PTR Unit 3902 0...

Page 167: ...the counters SP7 803 for these units on the previous SMC logging data list the list that was output in the Before removing the old parts section 6 Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7 950 3 2 3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK 1 Clean the exposure glasses for DF and book scanning 2 Enter the user tools mode 3 Do the Automatic Color Calibration ACC for the copier mode prin...

Page 168: ...PM Parts Settings D037 D038 D040 D041 3 4 SM 6 Exit the SP mode 3 2 4 OPERATION CHECK Check if the sample image has been copied normally ...

Page 169: ...ENT SECTION 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 7 1 17 2012 Line Position Adjustment 53 54 01 09 2009 Image Creation 128 02 04 2009 BCU 134 02 04 2009 Controller 138 140 02 04 2009 NVRAM ...

Page 170: ......

Page 171: ...he following If there is a fax unit in the machine print out all messages stored in the memory the lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list If there are printer jobs in the machine print out all jobs in the printer buffer Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the network cable ...

Page 172: ...mber Description Q ty B645 5010 SD Card 1 B645 6820 USB Reader Writer 1 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter FLUKE87 1 C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1 A257 9300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart 3 pcs set 1 A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool 2 pcs set 2 ...

Page 173: ...e you do the following scanner adjustments Use S 2 1 test chart to do the following adjustments Scanner sub scan magnification A Sub scan magnification 1 Put the test chart on the exposure glass Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Adjust with SP4 008 if necessary Standard 1 0 Scanner leading edge and side to side registration A Leading Edge Registration ...

Page 174: ...Side Registration SP4 011 001 4 3 2 ARDF ARDF side to side leading edge registration and trailing edge A Leading edge registration B Side to Side registration Use A3 DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above 1 Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the registration Check the leading edge and side to side registration Adjust the...

Page 175: ...ont 5 0 mm SP6 006 006 Buckle Duplex Rear 5 0 mm SP6 006 007 Rear Edge Erase Trailing Edge 5 0 mm ARDF sub scan magnification 1 Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Adjust with SP6 017 001 if necessary Standard 5 0 Reduction mode 5 0 Enlargement mode 5 0 4 3 3 REGISTRATION Image Area A C 5 2 mm 0 2 B 2 0 mm Make sur...

Page 176: ...ng Area with SP2 109 003 Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page Print some pages of the Trimming Area for step 3 and 4 Then average the leading edge and side to side registration values and adjust each SP mode 3 Do the leading edge registration adjustment 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1 001 2 Select the adjustment conditions paper type and proce...

Page 177: ... mm 4 3 5 COLOR REGISTRATION Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints Do the following if color registration shifts Do Auto Color Registration as follows to do the forced line position adjustment 1 First do SP2 111 3 2 Then do SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the pro...

Page 178: ...t output You only need the printer gamma correction to fine tune to meet user requirements Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC You can adjust the gamma data for the following Highlight Middle Shadow areas IDmax The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 31 steps Copy Mode Photo Mode Full Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart Adjustment Standard ID max K C M ...

Page 179: ...w SP4 916 003 For adjusting M Shadow SP4 917 003 For adjusting Y Shadow SP4 918 003 Highlight Low ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart 4 For adjusting K Highlight SP4 915 005 For adjusting C Highlight SP4 916 005 For adjusting M Highlight SP4 917 005 For adjusti...

Page 180: ...4 909 004 Middle Middle ID K Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart 2 For adjusting K Middle SP4 909 002 Shadow High ID K Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 3 For adjusting K Shadow SP4 909 003 Highlight Low ID K Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the...

Page 181: ...nsity of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart 2 For adjusting K Middle SP4 910 002 For adjusting C Middle SP4 911 002 For adjusting M Middle SP4 912 002 For adjusting Y Middle SP4 913 002 Shadow High ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 3 For adjusting K Shadow SP4 910 003 For adjusting C Shadow SP4 911 003 For a...

Page 182: ...t the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart 1 For adjusting K ID max SP4 914 004 Middle Middle ID K Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart 2 For adjusting K Middle SP4 914 002 Shadow High ID K Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 3 For adjusting K Shadow SP4 9...

Page 183: ...mode 2400 x 600 photo mode 2400 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode K C M Y Highlight Shadow Middle IDmax SP1 104 1 SP1 104 2 SP1 104 3 SP1 104 4 SP1 104 21 SP1 104 22 SP1 104 23 SP1 104 24 SP1 104 41 SP1 104 42 SP1 104 43 SP1 104 44 SP1 104 61 SP1 104 62 SP1 104 63 SP1 104 64 Adjustment Procedure 1 Do ACC for the printer mode 2 Turn ...

Page 184: ...Image Adjustment D037 D038 D040 D041 4 14 SM test chart Adjust the density in this order ID Max Shadow Middle Highlight 8 Use SP1 105 001 to keep the adjusted settings ...

Page 185: ...lly resets the PM counter for the PCDU toner collection bottle after replacement But if you replace a bottle that is not full or near full then you must reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 019 to 1 before you start to work on the machine 1 Open the front door A 2 PCDU toner collection bottle A lock x 2 4 4 2 FRONT DOOR 1 Open the front door 2 PCDU toner collection bottle Sect...

Page 186: ...Exterior Covers D037 D038 D040 D041 4 16 SM 3 Release the belt A 4 Front door A x 2 pin x 2 4 4 3 ITB CLEANING UNIT COVER 1 Open the ITB cleaning unit cover A x 2 ...

Page 187: ...terior Covers SM 4 17 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 2 Release the tab A and then remove the ITB cleaning unit cover B 4 4 4 LEFT COVER 1 Left cover A x 10 4 4 5 REAR COVER 1 Rear cover A x 8 ...

Page 188: ...8 SM Remove the screw B of the lower cover when reinstalling the rear cover 4 4 6 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Rear lower cover A x 5 4 4 7 DUST FILTER 1 Dust filter cover A hooks 2 Dust filter B 4 4 8 RIGHT REAR COVER 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover ...

Page 189: ...D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 2 Open the duplex unit A 3 Right rear cover B x 5 4 4 9 OPERATION PANEL For D038 D041 1 Remove six screws on the operation panel A 2 Slide the operation panel to the front side 3 Disconnect the harness A ...

Page 190: ...B 4 4 10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT D038 D041 It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times When you replace the operation panel When you replace the controller board When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items 2 to 9 on the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press S press press 5 times to open the Self Diag...

Page 191: ...creen or press k when you are finished 6 Touch Exit on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu Save the calibration settings 4 4 11 INNER RIGHT COVER 1 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 2 Press the ITB lock lever A and turn it up clockwise as shown above 3 Inner right cover B x 2 4 4 12 INNER COVER 1 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bo...

Page 192: ...NT RIGHT COVER 1 Open the duplex unit 1 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 1 Inner right cover Section Inner Right Cover 2 Remove the front right cover A with the operation panel B lifted up x 1 4 4 14 RIGHT UPPER COVER 1 Right upper cover A x 2 ...

Page 193: ... SM 4 23 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 4 15 LEFT FRAME AND LEFT FRAME REAR COVER 1 Left frame cover A x 1 2 Left frame rear cover B x 2 4 4 16 PAPER EXIT COVER 1 Inverter tray A 2 Paper exit cover B x 1 ...

Page 194: ...4 4 17 INVERTER TRAY 1 Inverter tray A hooks 4 4 18 INNER TRAY 1 Inner tray A x 2 4 4 19 INNER REAR COVER 1 Left frame cover Section Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover 2 Paper exit cover Section Paper Exit Cover 3 Inner tray Section Inner Tray ...

Page 195: ...Exterior Covers SM 4 25 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 Inner rear cover A x 1 ...

Page 196: ...Scanner Unit D037 D038 D040 D041 4 26 SM 4 5 SCANNER UNIT 4 5 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Open the ARDF or platen cover 3 Glass cover A x 4 4 Scanner right cover A x 2 ...

Page 197: ...white marker B at the rear left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass 6 Rear scale A x 3 7 Exposure glass A with left scale Position the marker at the front left corner when you reattach the exposure glass 4 5 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS 1 Exposure glass with left scale Section Exposure Glass ...

Page 198: ...hree screws B do not need to be fully removed Just loosen them to remove the SBU cover 3 Original length sensors A hooks x1 x 1 each 4 5 3 EXPOSURE LAMP 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Operation panel Section Operation Panel 3 Exposure glass Section Exposure Glass ...

Page 199: ... Replacement Adjustment 4 Scanner rear cover A x 1 5 Disconnect the connector A from the lamp stabilizer B 6 Move the carriage unit A to the cutout position B 7 Cable guide A hooks Keep the cable guide for reassembling 8 Adjustor clamp B x 1 ...

Page 200: ...e cable clamp at the rear edge of the exposure lamp 11 Hold down the snap B and then slide the exposure lamp C to the front side 12 Exposure lamp A Reassembling Run the cable so there is no slack Slide the adjustor clamp A to adjust the cable slack 4 5 4 SCANNER MOTOR 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover ...

Page 201: ...belt x 1 3 Scanner motor A x 2 ground plate B x 1 Make sure that the ground plate B is attached when installing the scanner motor in the scanner motor bracket Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor Section Image Adjustment 4 5 5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU 1 Exposure glass Section Exposure Glass ...

Page 202: ... you replace the sensor board unit SP4 008 Sub Scan Mag Section Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg Section Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 011 Main Scan Reg Section Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 688 DF Density Adjustment Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different 4 5 6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover ...

Page 203: ...abilizer bracket A x 2 x 2 4 5 7 SCANNER HP SENSOR 1 Rear Cover Section Rear Cover 2 Scanner rear cover Section Exposure Lamp 3 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the right side by rotating the scanner motor B clockwise 4 Remove the mylar A 5 Remove the scanner HP sensor B x 1 hooks ...

Page 204: ...NSOR 1 Scanner rear cover Section Exposure Lamp 2 Holder bracket A x 1 3 Platen cover sensor B x 1 4 5 9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE 1 Rear Cover Section Rear Cover 2 Operation panel Section Operation Panel 3 Exposure glass Section Exposure Glass 4 Scanner left cover A x 2 ...

Page 205: ...41 Replacement Adjustment 5 Scanner left stay A x 3 6 Scanner front frame B x 5 7 Take aside the connector bracket A x 2 8 Scanner rear frame B x 8 x all x all 9 Scanner motor bracket Section Scanner Motor 10 Rear scanner drive pulley A x 1 ...

Page 206: ...aft C in the red arrow direction x 1 at front and remove the scanner drive pulley D x 1 When removing the rear scanner wire remove the e ring at the rear side of the shaft Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire 1 Position the center ball A in the middle of the forked holder 2 Pass the right end with the ball B through the square hole Pass the left end with ...

Page 207: ...he two green marks C come together when you have done this Stick the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pulley on the shaft A Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Insert the left end into the slit B The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley C and the rear track of the mov...

Page 208: ...the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time F C D A E B I d037r273 H G 7 Remove the tape from the drive pulley 8 Insert a scanner positioning pin A through the 2nd carriage hole B and the left holes C in the front rail Insert another scanner positioning pin D through the 1st carriage hole E and the right holes in the front rail F 9 Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the hole...

Page 209: ...s 4 Scanner left cover Section Front Scanner Wire 5 Scanner front frame Section Front Scanner Wire 6 Scanner left stay Section Front Scanner Wire 7 Scanner rear frame Section Front Scanner Wire 8 Follow steps 10 through 14 in Section Front Scanner Wire You can remove the rear scanner wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire 1 Position the ce...

Page 210: ...h the screw at this time 5 Install the wire The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front This must show as a mirror image Example At the front of the machine the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the machine At the rear of the machine it must face the rear 6 Do steps...

Page 211: ...N The caution decal is placed as shown below Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit This copier uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 648 663 nm and an output of 9 mW The laser can cause serious eye injury 4 6 2 LASER UNIT Before installing a new laser unit remove the polyg...

Page 212: ...e laser unit x 4 2 Polygon motor holder bracket B with a red tag x 3 3 Install the three screws C removed in step 2 in the laser unit 4 Reinstall the polygon mirror motor cover A x 4 Before removing the old laser unit Do the following settings before removing the laser unit These are adjustments for skew ...

Page 213: ...6 Exit the SP mode 7 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit If you did not do the procedure in Before removing the laser unit before removing the laser unit you must do the following 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier 2 Remove the left cover see the followin...

Page 214: ...Laser Optics D037 D038 D040 D041 4 44 SM Removing the laser unit 1 Left cover A x 10 2 ITB cleaning unit A x 2 3 Ventilation rear fan holder A x 2 x 1 4 Ventilation front fan holder B x 2 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 215: ...re 0 If these settings are not 0 execute Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit described above If this step is not correctly done an image problem may occur on printouts 4 Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new LD unit SP2 101 001 to 004 Color Registration Main Scan for each color SP2 101 013 to 016 Color Registration Sub Scan for each color SP2 102 001 00...

Page 216: ...stment 7 Select 0 with SP2 109 003 after printing the 1 dot trimming pattern 8 Do the line position adjustment First do SP2 111 003 Then do SP2 111 001 To check if SP 2 111 001 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 010 to 012 9 Exit the SP mode 4 6 3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR 1 Laser unit Section Laser Unit 2 Pol...

Page 217: ...r optics housing unit Do the Line Pos Adjust Execute Mode c SP2 111 003 Then do the Line Pos Adjust Execute Mode a SP2 111 001 To check if SP 2 111 001 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP2 194 010 to 012 ...

Page 218: ...objects touch the development sleeve 1 Open the front door 2 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3 Turn the ITB lock lever A to the up position 4 PCDU B x 2 each When installing a new PCDU Remove the cover A on the toner inlet and pull out the tape B from the new development unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine ...

Page 219: ...lack 3902 009 Cyan 3902 010 Magenta 3902 011 Yellow 3902 012 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit automatically after you turn the power on again 2 If you install a new development unit only set SP 3902 xxx to 1 Black 3902 001 Cyan 3902 002 Magenta 3902 003 Yellow 3902 004 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development unit auto...

Page 220: ...ge Creation D037 D038 D040 D041 4 50 SM 6 Rear cover A x 2 7 Drum unit A and development unit B x 1 When the development unit is removed from the drum unit clean the entrance mylar A with a vacuum cleaner ...

Page 221: ...tomatically reset the PM counters for the development unit and drum unit even if the drum unit was not changed To avoid resetting both counters after you install a new development unit only make sure that step 2 in the procedure above is done before installing 4 7 3 TONER HOPPER UNIT Toner hopper unit K C M 1 Open the front door 2 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3...

Page 222: ... 2 x 1 for K and M 2 for C x 1 each 7 Place the toner hopper unit A on sheets of paper Toner hopper unit Y 1 Open the front door 2 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3 Inner cover Section Inner Cover 4 PCDU Section PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 5 Gear cover A x 2 x 2 ...

Page 223: ...utter A Do not try to open the toner hopper shutter fully at one try This shutter comes off easily without the inner cover If the toner hopper shutter has come off reattach it 2 Pour the developer 8 g into the inlet B of the toner hopper unit 3 Close the toner hopper shutter 4 Reassemble the machine The black developer bottle is labeled as shown in the photograph to the right The color toner hoppe...

Page 224: ... Inner cover Section Inner Cover 4 Inner tray Section Inner Tray 5 Toner supply drive gear A hook x 1 6 Pull the toner supply drive shaft B 7 Take aside the toner supply gear unit A x 3 NOTE When removing the toner supply gear unit for Yellow one of screws on the toner supply gear unit is difficult to see 1 Remove the left cover Section Left Cover Rev 01 2009 ...

Page 225: ...n A as shown above 8 Release the clamp A and then disconnect the harness B 9 Toner supply motor A x 1 x 1 x 2 4 7 5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR 1 Open the front door 2 PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3 PCDU Yellow Section PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit ...

Page 226: ...Image Creation D037 D038 D040 D041 4 56 SM 4 Ventilation Fan Front Ventilation Fan 5 Disconnect two harnesses A 6 Toner collection motor assembly A x 2 x 3 7 Gears A x 1 ...

Page 227: ...OLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR 1 Toner collection motor assembly Section Toner Collection Motor 2 PCDU toner collection bottle full sensor A x 1 x 1 hooks 4 7 7 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE SET SWITCH 1 Toner collection motor assembly Section Toner Collection Motor 2 PCDU toner collection bottle set switch A hooks x 1 ...

Page 228: ...eation D037 D038 D040 D041 4 58 SM 4 7 8 RFID BOARD 1 All toner hopper units Section Toner Hopper Unit 2 Inner tray Section Inner Tray 3 Toner supply drive shafts A 4 Harness cover A x 1 5 RFID board A x 3 x 1 ...

Page 229: ... reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SPs 3902 017 and 020 to 1 before you turn off the power switch If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the units automatically after you turn the power on again SP 3902 017 is for the ITB cleaning unit and SP 3902 020 is for the ITB toner collection bottle 1 Left cover Section Left Cover 2 ITB cleaning unit A x 2 When install...

Page 230: ...AGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1 Left cover Section Left Cover 2 ITB cleaning unit Section ITB Cleaning Unit 3 PCU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 4 Unlock the ITB lock lever Section Inner Right Cover 5 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 6 Hinge bracket A x 1 7 Pull the lever B to open the paper transfer unit 8 Harness cover C x 1 ...

Page 231: ...e the ITB unit motor after pulling out the ITB unit from the machine Next procedure 4 8 4 ITB UNIT MOTOR 1 ITB cleaning unit Section ITB Cleaning Unit 2 ITB unit Section ITB Unit 3 ITB unit motor A x 3 x 1 4 8 5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT 1 ITB cleaning unit Section ITB Cleaning Unit 2 ITB unit Section ITB Unit 3 ITB unit motor Section ITB Unit Motor ...

Page 232: ...Image Transfer D037 D038 D040 D041 4 62 SM 4 Two stays A x 2 each 5 Rear holder bracket A as seen from the front x 1 M3x10 6 Front holder bracket A as seen from the rear x 1 M3x10 ...

Page 233: ...Image Transfer SM 4 63 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 7 Handle A x 2 M3x10 8 Guide bracket A 9 Pull the tension roller A as shown ...

Page 234: ...0 Front guide pin bracket A x 1 11 Press roller bracket B x 2 12 Attach the handle which was removed in step 6 to the projection B on the rear left side x 1 This handle will be used as a stand in later steps 13 Stand the ITB unit A as shown above ...

Page 235: ...e in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims There are two rims width C about 5 mm at the front and rear edges inside the image transfer belt This belt must be installed the correct way around When you reinstall the image transfer belt unit install it with the number A on the belt at the rear side of the unit 4 8 6 ITB CONTACT MOTOR 1 Pull out all the toner bottles 2 Inverter tray Sect...

Page 236: ...41 4 66 SM 4 Take aside the ITB contact motor unit A x 2 5 Disconnect two harnesses A and then remove the ITB contact motor unit x 1 6 ITB contact motor A x 2 4 8 7 ITB CONTACT SENSOR 1 ITB contact motor unit Section ITB Contact Motor ...

Page 237: ...Image Transfer SM 4 67 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 2 ITB contact sensor A hooks ...

Page 238: ...l a new PTR unit then set SP 3902 018 to 1 before you start this procedure If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Open the paper transfer unit A 3 Remove the PTR unit A releasing the two locks B ...

Page 239: ...ep these two springs from the old PTR unit and install them in the new PTR unit 4 9 2 OPENING THE PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Hinge bracket A x 1 3 Open the paper transfer unit B 4 9 3 ID SENSOR BOARD 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit ...

Page 240: ...board as shown above remove all black spacers These black spacers should be used when a new ID sensor board is installed Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require cleaning maintenance every EM Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning 1 PCDU K Section PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 2 ITB unit Section ITB Image Transfer Belt Unit ...

Page 241: ...new ID sensor unit board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit board 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier 2 Enter the SP mode 3 Input all correction coefficients A for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit board For example input 0 98 with SP3 362 013 4 Exit the SP mode 4 9 4 TEMPERATURE ...

Page 242: ...Paper Transfer D037 D038 D040 D041 4 72 SM 2 Temperature and humidity sensor A x 1 x 1 ...

Page 243: ...Y 4 Development motor CMY 5 Development clutch K 6 Drum Development motor K 7 Paper feed motor T1 8 Paper feed motor T2 9 Registration motor There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing Duplex inverter motor Duplex Entrance Motor Duplex Exit Motor By pass Motor 4 10 1 GEAR UNIT 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover ...

Page 244: ...S CB board A 5 Pull all the PCDUs to the front side Section PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 6 Gear unit A x all x all blue arrows x 8 The picture below shows how to remove the screw B of the gear unit Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit Do the following procedures after reinstalling the gear unit 1 Turn on the main power switch ...

Page 245: ...and that the ITB unit is correctly set Do Drum Phase Adj again after checking the PCDUs and ITB unit When the result is still 2 or 3 after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit Check that the gear unit is installed correctly 5 Exit the SP mode 4 10 2 REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover 3 Open the controller box Section Controller...

Page 246: ... motor T1 A x 1 x 2 The picture below shows how to remove the screw B of the paper feed motor T1 4 10 4 PAPER FEED MOTOR T2 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover 3 Paper feed motor T2 A x 1 x 2 4 10 5 DRUM MOTOR CMY ...

Page 247: ... controller box Section Controller Box 4 Drum motor CMY A x 3 x 1 4 10 6 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR CMY 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover 3 Open the controller box Section Controller Box 4 Development motor CMY A x 3 x 1 4 10 7 DRUM DEVELOPMENT MOTOR K 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 1 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover 2 Open the controller box Section Cont...

Page 248: ...ion Controller Box 3 Drum Development Motor K Section Drum Development Motor K 4 Remove the bracket with the development clutch K A x 2 x 1 x 1 5 Remove the development clutch K B from the bracket 4 10 9 FUSING PAPER EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 1 Rear lower cover Section Rear Lower Cover 2 Open the controller box Section Controller Box 3 Drum Development Motor K Section Drum Develop...

Page 249: ...ustment 4 Loosen the stay A x 1 hook B x 1 The hook B is installed as shown above Do not pull the stay by force or the hook might be broken 5 Fusing paper exit motor A x 3 x 1 The picture below shows how to remove the screw B of the fusing paper exit motor ...

Page 250: ...Drive Unit D037 D038 D040 D041 4 80 SM ...

Page 251: ...uide Plate Cleaning Procedure Stripper Plate Section Stripper Plate Thermopile Section Thermopile 4 11 2 FUSING UNIT Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section The fusing unit can cause serious burns 1 If you install a new fusing unit at PM for example then set SP 3902 014 to 1 before you start this procedure If you do ...

Page 252: ... sure that the both lock levers B are locked before closing the duplex unit Otherwise these lock levers B can be broken 4 11 3 ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Entrance Guide Plate A x 2 Cleaning Requirement The entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval Clean the entrance guide plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points...

Page 253: ...Fusing SM 4 83 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 11 4 STRIPPER PLATE 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover A x 4 3 Spring A and bearing B at front and rear side ...

Page 254: ...4 x 1 5 Release the springs A at the front and rear side 6 Stripper plate B Cleaning Requirement The stripper plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval Clean the stripper plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points ...

Page 255: ...NING PROCEDURE The exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Open the exit guide plate A 3 Clean the exit guide plate A with a cloth moistened with alcohol 4 11 6 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit ...

Page 256: ...cover A x 4 3 Remove the cable A from the rear stay x 1 4 Remove the cable A from the front stay x 1 The color of the pressure roller fusing lamp cord differs depending on the destination Red 220 240 V Blue 120 V 5 Front pressure roller lamp stay B x 1 ...

Page 257: ...041 Replacement Adjustment 6 Pressure roller fusing lamp A 4 11 7 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Remove the cords A from the front stay x 2 3 Remove the cords A from the rear stay x 2 4 Rear stay B x 2 ...

Page 258: ...e you start this procedure If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing belt automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 3 Heating roller fusing lamp Section Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 4 Idle gear A and fusing roller gear B ...

Page 259: ...g SM 4 89 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 5 Remove the front cord A of the pressure roller fusing lamp x 1 6 Front stay B x 2 7 Spring A and bearing B at front and rear side 8 Top frame A x 4 x 1 ...

Page 260: ...gs A at the front and rear side 10 Stripper plate B 11 Take the thermostat base A aside x 2 This prevents the fusing belt from being torn or scratched when the fusing belt is removed from the fusing unit 12 Bearings A of the heating roller C ring x 1 each ...

Page 261: ...rollers 15 Fusing belt A 4 11 9 HEATING FUSING AND TENSION ROLLER If you install a new fusing roller set SP 3902 015 to 1 before you start this procedure If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing unit automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Fusing belt with rollers Section Fusing Belt ...

Page 262: ...he following places Fusing Roller Apply Barrierta S552R to the area A at the front side of the fusing roller Apply Barrierta S552R to the area B at the rear side of the fusing roller Do not apply lubricant to areas other than the areas A and B as shown above 4 11 10PRESSURE ROLLER 1 Fusing belt with rollers Section Fusing Belt 2 Pressure roller fusing lamp Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ...

Page 263: ...037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 3 Pressure levers A at the rear side snap ring x 1 spring x 1 4 Top right frame A x 4 5 Pressure roller gear A and bearing B at the rear side C ring x 1 6 Bearing C C ring x 1 ...

Page 264: ...lean the pressure roller with a cloth moistened with alcohol 4 11 11HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTATS 1 Fusing upper cover Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 2 Heating roller thermostats A x 3 Do not re use a thermostat that is already opened Safety is not guaranteed if you do this 4 11 12HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR 1 Fusing upper cover Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ...

Page 265: ... roller thermistor A x 1 Cleaning Requirement The heating roller thermistor requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval Clean the heating roller thermistor with a dry cloth 4 11 13PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR Pressure Roller Thermistor Center 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ...

Page 266: ...Thermistor center assembly A x 1 x 1 4 Pressure roller thermistor Center A x 1 Pressure Roller Thermistor Center 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover Section Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 3 Thermistor end assembly A x 1 x 1 ...

Page 267: ...require cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval Clean the pressure roller thermistors center and end with a dry cloth 4 11 14PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 1 Fusing belt with rollers Section Fusing Belt 2 Pressure roller Section Pressure Roller 3 Pressure roller thermostats A x 2 4 11 15THERMOPILE 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit ...

Page 268: ...rmopile cover A x 2 4 Thermopile B When cleaning the lens of the thermopile Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down Otherwise you may get a serious burn 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Clean the thermopile lens A with a dry cloth ...

Page 269: ...D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 11 16CLEANING UNIT OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover A x 4 3 Top right frame A x 4 4 Install the cleaning unit A in the fusing unit ...

Page 270: ...Fusing D037 D038 D040 D041 4 100 SM 5 Secure the cleaning unit A x 2 6 Reassemble the fusing unit ...

Page 271: ...r 2 A 4 12 2 FEED ROLLER Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Paper tray 1 or 2 Section Paper Tray 2 Press down the bottom plate A 3 Slide the feed roller shaft B to the rear side x 1 4 Feed roller C hook x 1 When reinstalling the feed roller Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it If you do clean the feed roller with a damp cloth or alcohol 4 12 3 FRICTION PAD 1 Paper tray 1 or 2 Secti...

Page 272: ...roller shaft to the front side and then remove it 5 Friction pad A hooks spring x 1 When reinstalling the friction pad Make sure that the mylar A does not go under the friction pad when reinstalling the friction pad Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it If you do clean the feed roller with a damp cloth or alcohol ...

Page 273: ...acement Adjustment 4 12 4 PAPER SIZE SWITCH 1 Paper tray 1 and 2 Section Paper Tray Paper size switch T1 A Paper size switch T2 B 2 Paper size switch A hooks x 1 4 12 5 PAPER END SENSOR Paper End Sensor T1 1 Paper tray 1 and 2 Section Paper Tray ...

Page 274: ...per End Sensor T2 1 Paper tray 1 and 2 Section Paper Tray 2 Release the clamp A 3 Paper end sensor T2 B hooks x 1 4 12 6 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Open the paper transfer unit to the fully open position Section PTR Paper Transfer Roller Unit 3 Registration roller guide A x 2 ...

Page 275: ...05 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 Close the paper transfer unit A 5 Relay guide plate B x 2 6 Upper vertical transport guide C x 1 x 2 7 Registration sensor A x 2 hooks x 1 Cleaning the registration roller ...

Page 276: ...total count Never use alcohol to clean the registration roller 4 12 7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR Vertical Transport Sensor 1 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Open the paper transfer unit to the fully open position Section PTR Paper Transfer Roller Unit 3 Middle guide plate A x 2 4 Open the lower right door A 5 Release the belt B ...

Page 277: ...ustment 6 Open the lower guide plate A 7 Middle guide bracket B x 4 x 2 x 1 8 Sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 9 Vertical transport sensor 1 B x 1 hooks Vertical Transport Sensor 2 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Open the lower right door A 3 Release the belt B ...

Page 278: ...Paper Feed D037 D038 D040 D041 4 108 SM 4 Release the rear pivot A and then remove the lower right door B 5 Lower guide bracket A x 2 6 Sensor bracket A x 1 7 Vertical transport sensor 2 B hooks x 1 ...

Page 279: ...e solenoid fan B hooks When installing the junction gate solenoid fan Make sure that the junction gate solenoid fan is installed with its decal facing to the left side 4 13 2 PAPER EXIT UNIT 1 Fusing Unit Section Fusing Unit 2 Front right cover Section Front Right Cover 3 Junction gate solenoid fan base Section Junction Gate Solenoid Fan 4 Paper exit cover Section Paper Exit Cover 5 Inner Tray Sec...

Page 280: ... 110 SM 6 Front harness cover A x 1 7 Remove or disconnect the following Two screws A at the front side Front harness B Ground cable C x 1 Rear harness D 8 Paper exit unit A 4 13 3 FUSING EXIT 1 Paper exit unit Section Paper Exit Unit ...

Page 281: ...t SM 4 111 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 2 Sensor assembly A x 1 x 1 x 1 3 Fusing exit sensor A x 1 4 13 4 PAPER EXIT SENSOR 1 Paper exit unit Section Paper Exit Unit 2 Paper exit sensor A hooks x 1 ...

Page 282: ...e paper exit unit so that A is facing up Otherwise the paper exit sensor feeler interrupts the installation of the paper exit sensor Insert the hook B first 4 13 5 INVERTER SENSOR 1 Paper exit unit Section Paper Exit Unit 2 Remove the screw A 3 Release all clamps that clamp the harness B ...

Page 283: ... D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 4 Move the sensor assembly A to the cutout B and then remove it x1 x 1 5 Inverter sensor A hooks 4 13 6 INVERTER MOTOR 1 Paper exit unit Section Paper Exit Unit 2 Inverter motor A x 2 x 1 ...

Page 284: ...114 SM 4 13 7 FUSING FRONT FAN 1 Front right cover Section Front Right Cover 2 Fusing front fan A x 2 x 1 x 1 When installing the fusing front fan Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side ...

Page 285: ...placement Adjustment 4 14 DUPLEX UNIT 4 14 1 DUPLEX UNIT 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Remove the screw A 3 Move the duplex unit in the direction shown by and remove the hook A 4 Disconnect the harness B 5 Release the front and rear arms A B x 1 each ...

Page 286: ...ide the duplex unit B to the front side and then remove it 4 14 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Duplex inner cover A x 2 3 Duplex entrance guide unit A hook x 3 Lift up the duplex guide plate A first when reinstalling the duplex entrance ...

Page 287: ... SM 4 117 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment guide unit 4 Duplex outer guide plate A x 4 5 Duplex entrance sensor A hook 4 14 3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 1 Pull out the 1st tray 2 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit ...

Page 288: ... Duplex exit sensor assembly cover A x 1 2 Duplex exit sensor assembly B x 1 ground screw x 1 x 1 x 1 3 Duplex exit sensor A hook 4 14 4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Duplex inner cover Section Duplex Entrance Sensor ...

Page 289: ...lex entrance motor with the bracket A x 3 x1 x 1 4 Separate the duplex entrance motor A from the bracket x 2 4 14 5 DUPLEX EXIT MOTOR 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Duplex inner cover Section Duplex Entrance Sensor 3 Duplex exit motor with the bracket A x 3 x 2 x 1 ...

Page 290: ...t motor A from the bracket x 2 4 14 6 BY PASS MOTOR 1 Duplex unit Section Duplex Unit 2 Duplex inner cover Section Duplex Entrance Sensor 3 By pass motor with the bracket A x 3 x 2 x 1 Remove the clamp B from the bracket to disconnect the harness 4 By pass motor A x 2 ...

Page 291: ...inner cover Section Duplex Entrance Sensor 3 Reinstall the duplex unit once and open it 4 Disconnect the harness A 5 Close the duplex unit 6 Open the by pass tray unit A 7 By pass tray unit x 2 hook B Use a flat head screw driver or similar tool to push the hook B down 4 14 8 BY PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR 1 Open the by pass tray unit ...

Page 292: ...it D037 D038 D040 D041 4 122 SM 2 By pass tray right cover A x 2 3 By pass paper length sensor A x 1 4 14 9 BY PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR 1 By pass tray unit Section By Pass Tray Unit 2 By pass tray cover A hook x 1 ...

Page 293: ...ize detection switch so that the hole B in this switch faces the projection C of the left side fence bar 3 Reassemble the copier 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 5 Check this switch operation with SP5803 046 By Pass Size Detection SW Input Check Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A3 SEF 00001001 A5 SEF 00001110 B4 SEF 00001011 B6 SEF 00001100 A4 SEF 00000011 A6 SEF...

Page 294: ...nsor A x 1 hook Reinstalling the By pass Paper End Sensor Reinstall the right hook first and then the left hook using a flat head screw driver or similar tool 4 14 11BY PASS FEED ROLLER 1 By pass tray unit Section By Pass Tray Unit 2 By pass feed roller A hook 4 14 12BY PASS TRAY HP SENSOR 1 Open the by pass tray unit 2 Open the duplex unit ...

Page 295: ...Duplex Unit SM 4 125 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 3 Remove the hand holder A 4 Rotate the actuator A counter clockwise as shown above 5 By pass tray HP sensor B hook ...

Page 296: ...ents D037 D038 D040 D041 4 126 SM 4 15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4 15 1 BOARDS Controller Box Closed A BCU B i Controller Board D038 D041 B1 i Controller Board D037 D040 C HDD D038 D041 only D DRB E PSU Controller Box Open ...

Page 297: ...S TTS Board G HVPS CB Board 4 15 2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Scanner cable bracket A x 4 3 Loosen the eight screws 4 Slide up the controller box cover B and then remove it 4 15 3 CONTROLLER BOX Opening the controller box 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover ...

Page 298: ...he four screws and disconnect the scanner cable A x 1 ground screw x 1 4 Open the controller box A 4 15 4 BCU Do not replace the BCU and CTL boards together If required See NOTE 1 after NVRAM Replacement section 4 15 12 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Controller box cover Section Controller Box Cover Rev 02 2009 ...

Page 299: ...ew BCU after you replace the BCU 3 Reassemble the machine 4 Turn on the main power of the machine 5 SC995 01 occurs 6 Enter the serial number with SP5811 004 7 Turn the main power of the machine off and on Make sure you print out the SMC reports SP Mode Data and Logging Data before you replace the NVRAM Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damag...

Page 300: ...D041 4 130 SM 3 HDD assembly A x 3 x 2 from the controller board 4 HDD A x 4 x 2 Reconnect the harnesses to the controller board 4 15 6 CONTROLLER BOX FAN 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Controller box cover Section Controller Box Cover ...

Page 301: ...justment 3 Controller box fan A x 2 x 2 x 1 When installing the controller box fan Make sure that the controller box fan is installed with its decal facing upward 4 15 7 FUSING REAR FAN 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Fusing rear fan with the bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 302: ...en installing the fusing rear fan Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side 4 15 8 PSU 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 DRB with the bracket A x 4 x all x all 3 Power cord A Blue ground screw x 1 x 2 4 Remove the clamp B from the bracket 5 PSU board C x 9 x All x All ...

Page 303: ...PS TTS BOARD 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box Section Controller Box 3 Fusing rear fan A x 2 x 1 x 1 4 HVPS TTS board B x 5 x all 4 15 10HVPS CB BOARD 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box Section Controller Box 3 HVPS CB board A x 6 All s ...

Page 304: ...not replace the BCU and CTL boards together If required See NOTE 1 after NVRAM Replacement section 4 15 12 1 Rear cover Section Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box Section Controller Box 3 Controller box left bracket A x 5 For D037 D040 1 i controller board A x 9 x all Rev 02 2009 ...

Page 305: ...rical Components SM 4 135 D037 D038 D040 D041 Replacement Adjustment 2 Remove the Interface rails A NVRAM B and RAM DIMM C For D038 D041 1 HDD Section HDD Only for D038 D041 2 i controller board A x 8 x all ...

Page 306: ...rn on the main power of the machine Make sure you print out the SMC reports SP Mode Data and Logging Data before you replace the NVRAM Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board When installing a new HDD unit 1 Turn the main power switch on The disk is automatically ...

Page 307: ...ddress book and document server documents if needed must be input again If you previously backed up the address book to an SD card with SP5846 051 you can use SP 5846 052 to copy the data from the SD card to the hard disk If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature the DOS function must be set up again For more see Section 1 Installation If the customer is using the optional Brows...

Page 308: ...VRAM on the Controller 1 Make sure that you have the SMC report factory settings This report comes with the machine 2 Output the SMC data SP5 990 001 if possible 3 Turn the main switch off Then unplug the power cord 4 Install a New NVRAM on the controller Then reassemble the machine 5 Turn the main switch on 6 SC995 02 occurs 7 Turn the machine off and on 8 Do the process control self check 9 Do A...

Page 309: ...eplace CTL board and NVRAM first if it is not possible to program any SP mode 1 Replace CTL board and NVRAM 2 Turn the main power on 3 SC995 occurs 4 Turn the main power off and on 5 Replace the BCU board and NVRAM 6 Turn the main power on 7 SC195 occurs 8 Enter the serial number with SP5 811 001 factory SP mode 9 Enter the serial number again with SP5 811 004 10 Enter the SP mode settings that wa...

Page 310: ...P This machine boots up the modules in the following order Module Name 1 System application 2 Copy application 3 Printer application 4 Web System application 5 Scanner application 6 Fax application It takes approximately 90 seconds to boot up all modules Rev 02 2009 ...

Page 311: ...SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE SECTION 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 10 12 05 07 2009 Firmware Update 26 27 05 21 2009 NVRAM 26 12 22 2009 NVRAM ...

Page 312: ......

Page 313: ...rmation System SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables 5 1 2 TYPES OF SP MODES D038 D041 System SP SP modes related to the engine functions Printer SP SP modes related to the controller functions Scanner SP SP modes related to the scanner functions Fax SP SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes System Printer Scanner or Fax from the touch panel as shown ...

Page 314: ...umber keys if you know the SP number Then press The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing If not just press the required SP Mode number Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group Press to scroll to the previous or ...

Page 315: ...de SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust 3 Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want to open Then press that number to expand the list 4 Use the center touch panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press it The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default...

Page 316: ... This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on 2 Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to 1 if you must use the printer bit switches 3 After machine servicing is completed Change SP5169 from 1 to 0 Turn the machine off an...

Page 317: ...is the default value of the menu 2 Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad To switch between positive plus and negative minus values press the period asterisk key 3 To validate the value press the OK key To cancel the value press the cancel key F Activating Copy Mode You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running When you do so the copier outputs images or patterns that help yo...

Page 318: ...ddle Thick 90 1 105 g m2 24 28lb Thick Paper 1 105 1 169 g m2 28 5 44 9lb Thick Paper 2 169 1 210 g m2 45 56lb Thick Paper 3 210 1 256 g m2 56lb 68lb Paper Type N Normal paper MTH Middle thick paper TH Thick paper Paper Feed Station P Paper tray B By pass table Color Mode Color K Black in B W mode Y M or C Yellow Magenta or Cyan in Full Color mode YMC Only for Yellow Magenta and Cyan FC Full Color...

Page 319: ...M If you do a RAM clear this SP mode will be reset to the default value ENG and CTL show which NVRAM contains the data ENG NVRAM on the BCU board CTL NVRAM on the controller board The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right hand column of the SP table in the following way Adjustable range Default setting Step Alphanumeric If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown ...

Page 320: ...tion Operating system Flash ROM on the controller board System Copy Printer Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Printer Scanner Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Scanner Fax Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Fax NIB Network Interface Flash ROM on the controller board Network Support Operation Panel Panel ...

Page 321: ...nisher L Model D037 D040 Type of firmware Function Location of firmware Message shown Engine Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine System Copy Application Operating system Flash ROM on the controller board System Copy Printer Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Printer Scanner Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Scanner Fax Applicat...

Page 322: ...e service slot after the power has been switched on Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature high humidity or exposure to direct sunlight Always handle SD cards with care Do not bend or scratch them Do not let the SD card get exposed to shock or vibration Make sure that the write ...

Page 323: ...nto this folder Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card Copy the only model firmware you want Updating Procedure 1 Turn the main power switch off 2 Remove the slot cover x 1 3 Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 Make sure the label on the SD card faces the rear side of the machine 4 Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place You will hear it click Make ...

Page 324: ...on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished 9 The Update is Done message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated 10 Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the Update is Done message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel 11 Press in the SD card to release it ...

Page 325: ... automatically from the card without the menu display 5 2 4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL Do the following procedure to update the LCDC LCD Control Board 1 Turn the copier main switch off 2 Remove the SD slot cover x 1 3 Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 4 Switch the copier main switch on 5 The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds 6 Touch Ope Panel xx 7 xx differ...

Page 326: ...update program started Controller program abnormal If the second attempt fails replace controller board 24 SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly or use another SD card 30 No HDD available for stamp data download HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks 31 Data incorrect for continuous download Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for the download the re sta...

Page 327: ...ailed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the BCU board 42 Operation panel module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the LCDC 43 Stamp data module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the hard disks 44 Controller module download failed Rep...

Page 328: ...SD Card Slot 2 4 Switch the copier main power switch on The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds 5 Touch Language Data 2 on the screen or press 6 Touch LANG 1 1 or LANG 2 2 Key What it does LANG 1 1 Touch this button on the screen or press on the 10 key pad to open the next screen so you can select the 1st language LANG 1 2 Touch this button on the screen or press on the 10 key pad to open ...

Page 329: ...ct touch 7 or 9 on the screen or press or to show more choices The Download Screen opens after you select a language The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows The following show to right of the selection 1 The first column shows the language currently selected 2 The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language The example below shows that the download will replace Japa...

Page 330: ... downloading The operation panel switches off The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly 11 After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD switch the copier main power switch off Then remove the SD card from the slot 12 Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation ...

Page 331: ... normal operation 5 4 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET System Setting Reset The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press System Settings You must press first 3 Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings 4 Press exit when the message tells ...

Page 332: ...ng Reset D037 D038 D040 D041 5 20 SM 3 Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings 4 Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset ...

Page 333: ...hree types of self diagnostics for the controller 1 Power on self diagnostics The machine automatically starts the self diagnostics just after the power has been turned on 2 SC detection The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power on or during operation The following shows the workflow of the power on and detailed self diagnostics ...

Page 334: ...tination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards Refer to the following table for the memory size of each SD card Outline of SD Card Appli Move 1 Choose a SD card with enough space Do not use an SD card if it has been used on a computer Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used 2 Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move Then move the application fro...

Page 335: ...ccurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied into this SD card 3 Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 2 The application program is copied from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 001 Move Exec 7 Follow the ...

Page 336: ...the application program to SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec 7 Follow the messages shown on the operation panel 8 Turn the main switch off 9 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine 10 Turn the main s...

Page 337: ...s After the hard disks have been replaced The print data contains the controller software Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Select SP5853 and then press EXECUTE The following screen opens while the stamp data is downloading The download is finished when the message prompts you to close 3 Press the Exit button Then turn the copier off ...

Page 338: ...RAM data upload To the SD Card according to the procedure in the Service Manual 3 Perform the Memory Clear SP5801 001 or 002 4 Perform the NVRAM Data Download from the SD Card according to the procedure in the Service Manual 5 Manually input the data listed above 5 8 1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card This data ...

Page 339: ...the controller and BCU is defective Do the download procedure again if the download fails Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM data 1 Switch the copier main power switch off 2 Remove the SD slot cover x 1 3 Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 4 Switch the copier main po...

Page 340: ... sure that the write protection on the SD card is off 3 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine 4 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine x 1 5 Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 for service use 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Enter the SP mode 8 Do SP5 846 051 Backup All Addr Book 9 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 10 Remove the ...

Page 341: ...D card slot 2 4 Turn on the main power switch 5 Enter the SP mode 6 Do SP5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book 7 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 9 Install the SD slot cover The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded If the...

Page 342: ... error information from the HDD to an SD card Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine Then ask the user to reproduce the problem 5 10 2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target...

Page 343: ... slot 5 Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log SP5858 Debug Save When provides the following items for selection 1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number ...

Page 344: ...ction 4 Troubleshooting 6 Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information Touch 5859 Under 5859 press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record Enter the appropriate 4 digit number Then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered The following keys can be set with...

Page 345: ...600 WebDB 8 4600 GPS PM 3000 UCS 3300 PTS 9 2000 NCS 2000 NCS 6666 WebSys 10 2224 BCU 4126 DCS 2000 NCS The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero 0 Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language GSP PM GW Print Service Print Module PTS Print Server IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Cont...

Page 346: ... to 010 For example if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log The size of this area is limited to 4 MB 5 10 3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card 1 Insert the SD card into slot 2 serv...

Page 347: ...ntrol panel enter 01 Then hold down D for at least 3 seconds until the machine beeps and then release it This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives 3 Switch the machine off and on to resume operation The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk This lets the service representative retrieve it on their next visit by ...

Page 348: ... created on the card by the card save function Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact Card Save SD has Add and New menu items Card Save Add Appends files to the SD Card Does not overwrite existing files If the card becomes full or if all file names are used an error will be displayed on the operation panel Subsequent jobs will not be stored Card Save New Overwrite...

Page 349: ...d then press the button to register the change The result should look like 00010000 By doing this Card Save option will appear in the List Test Print menu 7 Press Exit to exit SP Mode 8 Press the User Tools Counter button 9 Select Printer Features 10 Card Save Add and Card Save New should be displayed on the screen Select Card Save Add or Card Save New ...

Page 350: ... SM 11 Press OK and then exit the User Tools Counter menu 12 Press the Printer button 13 Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel 14 Send a job to the printer The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below ...

Page 351: ...hing is displayed on the screen indicating that a Card Save operation was successful 16 Press Offline and then the Clear Stop button to exit Card Save mode 17 Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000 Press the button in the numeric keypad to register the changes 18 Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off For D037 D040 1 Turn the main power switch OFF ...

Page 352: ...OK button 7 Use the arrow key to turn Bit Switch 4 and use the numeric key 4 to turn bit 4 ON The result should look like 00010000 By doing this Card Save option will appear in List Test Print 8 Press the Escape button several times to exit SP Mode 9 Press the User Tools Counter button 10 Use the arrow key and select Printer Features 11 Use the arrow key and select List Test Print 12 Use the arrow...

Page 353: ...ror A card save process i e card detection change to kernel mode failed to initialize Card not found Card cannot be detected in the slot No memory Insufficient working memory to process the job Write error Failed to write to the card Other error An unknown error occurred If an error occurs pressing OK will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state 5 11 3 ERROR MESSAGES Card...

Page 354: ......

Page 355: ...TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 356: ......

Page 357: ...Service Call Conditions SM 6 1 D037 D038 D040 D041 Trouble shooting 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For SC Table information see Appendices ...

Page 358: ...or Conditions D037 D038 D040 D041 6 2 SM 6 2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS See Appendices for the following information Developer Initialization Result Process Control Self Check Result Line Position Adjustment Result ...

Page 359: ...er 600 dpi Input SP1 803 002 Plain paper 1200 dpi Input SP1 803 003 Thick paper Input 2 Turn the main power of the machine off and on 3 Check if all settings of the following SPs are 0 success SP1 803 004 Plain paper 600 dpi Result SP1 803 005 Plain paper 1200 dpi Result SP1 803 006 Thick paper Result If one of the settings of SP1 803 004 to 006 is 1 error return to step 1 and then input a value w...

Page 360: ...P1 801 002 As a result the result of the motor speed adjustment issues 1 error Adjust the settings of the SP1 830 001 to 003 so that the total value motor speed setting value input value is within the adjustable range for each motor described below SP No Max Min Title SP1 801 002 4 4 Regist Mot 120 0 3 default SP1 801 003 4 4 Bk OpcDevMot 120 0 4 default SP1 801 007 6 6 Fusing Mot 120 0 4 default ...

Page 361: ...t the settings of the SP1 830 001 to 003 so that the total value motor speed setting value input value is within the adjustable range for each motor described below SP No Max Min Title SP1 801 025 2 2 Duplex Entrance 60 SP1 801 027 2 2 Duplex Exit 60 SP1 801 033 4 4 Regist Mot 60 1200dpi SP1 801 034 2 2 Feed1 CW60 1200dpi SP1 801 035 2 2 Feed1 CCW60 1200dpi SP1 801 036 2 2 Feed2 CW60 1200dpi SP1 8...

Page 362: ... motor speed setting value input value is within the adjustable range for each motor described below SP No Max Min Title SP1 801 001 4 4 Regist Mot 60 Thick SP1 801 004 4 4 Bk OpcDevMot 60 Thick SP1 801 008 6 6 Fusing Mot 60 Thick SP1 801 010 4 4 TransferMot 60 Thick SP1 801 011 2 2 Feed1 CW60 Thick SP1 801 013 2 2 Feed1 CCW60 Thick SP1 801 015 2 2 Feed2 CW60 Thick SP1 801 017 2 2 Feed2 CCW60 Thic...

Page 363: ...ide fences of the tray are set neatly against the sides of the paper Make sure that the PTR unit is connected to the bracket correctly Make sure that the shafts of the duplex unit are not bent nor damaged Adjusting the Trapezoid Image 1 Remove the following items Fusing unit Section Fusing Unit Front right cover Section Front Right Cover PCDU toner collection bottle Section PCDU Toner Collection B...

Page 364: ...ch bracket A x 3 x 1 x 2 3 Loosen the four screws A on the front fusing guide 4 Remove the screw B on the adjustor lever This screw is not necessary after tightening the front fusing guide 5 If the horizontal lines slope down to the left A move the front fusing guide upward To ...

Page 365: ...m 6 If the horizontal lines slope down to the right A move the fusing front guide downward To do this turn the adjustor lever B of the front fusing guide counterclockwise C One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm 7 Retighten the four screws for the front fusing guide 8 Print out the test pattern and check the image quality 9 If the symptom still occurs repeat the above ...

Page 366: ...Jam Detection D037 D038 D040 D041 6 10 SM 6 4 JAM DETECTION See Appendices for the following information Paper Jam Display Jam Codes and Display Codes Paper Size Code Sensor Locations ...

Page 367: ...Electrical Component Defects SM 6 11 D037 D038 D040 D041 Trouble shooting 6 5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS See Appendices for the following information Sensors Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit ...

Page 368: ...ected the test ends Then the completion code shows in the operation panel display If an error is detected the test is interrupted Then an error code shows The table below lists the completion and error codes SP4 904 1 Register Access There are 16 bits switches in this SP Each bit indicates a different CPU The error result is displayed on the operation panel as a decimal number 0 Normal 1 Error SP4...

Page 369: ...appropriate for the board the scanner unit 5 Static electricity Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test 6 Others The scanner and i controller are incorrectly connected When you have completed a check turn the main switch off and on before you do another check When you have completed all necessary checks turn the main switch off and on Error No index entries found ...

Page 370: ......

Page 371: ...D037 D038 D040 D041 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES ...

Page 372: ......

Page 373: ...Internal Finisher 1 14 1 4 3 PLATEN ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 1 16 1 5 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 1 18 1 5 1 PRINTER DRIVERS 1 18 1 5 2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS 1 18 1 5 3 UTILITY SOFTWARE 1 19 1 6 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1 21 1 6 1 ARDF D366 STANDARD FOR H MODELS D038 D041 1 21 1 6 2 PAPER FEED UNIT D425 1 21 1 6 3 PAPER FEED UNIT D331 1 22 1 6 4 INTERNAL FINISHER PUNCH UNIT D429 1 23 1 6 5 SHIFT TRAY...

Page 374: ...5 3 4 Two tray Paper Feed Unit D331 3 4 1 Bin Tray D426 3 4 Shift Tray D427 3 5 3 1 2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS 3 5 ARDF 3 5 APPENDIX SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 APPENDIX SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 1 4 1 SC TABLES 4 1 4 1 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 1 Summary 4 1 SC Code Classification 4 2 4 1 2 SC1XX SCANNING 4 4 4 1 3 SC 2XX EXPOSURE 4 8 4 1 4 SC3XX IMAGE PROCESSING 1 4 13 4 1 5 SC4XX IMAGE PROCESSING 2 4...

Page 375: ...LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT 5 5 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6 1 6 1 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6 1 6 1 1 IMAGE QUALITY 6 1 6 1 2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 6 3 Test 6 3 Countermeasure list for color registration errors 6 3 6 1 3 IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS 6 9 APPENDIX JAM DETECTION 7 APPENDIX JAM DETECTION 7 1 7 1 JAM DETECTION 7 1 7 1 1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ...

Page 376: ... SP2 XXX Drum 9 24 SP3 XXX Process 9 112 SP4 XXX Scanner 9 162 SP5 XXX Mode 9 187 SP6 XXX Peripherals 9 250 SP7 XXX Data Log 9 253 SP8 xxx Data Log2 9 287 9 1 2 INPUT CHECK TABLE 9 336 Copier 9 337 ARDF D366 9 341 Internal Finisher D429 9 341 Table 1 Paper Size Switch Tray 1 2 9 343 Table 2 Paper Size By pass Table 9 344 Table 3 APS Original Size Detection 9 344 Table 4 Paper Size Switch Tray 3 4 ...

Page 377: ...M Appendix v D037 D038 D040 D041 9 2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE 9 356 9 2 1 SP1 XXX SERVICE MODE 9 356 9 3 SCANNER SP MODE 9 363 9 3 1 SP1 XXX SYSTEM AND OTHERS 9 363 9 3 2 SP2 XXX SCANNING IMAGE QUALITY 9 364 ...

Page 378: ......

Page 379: ...APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 380: ......

Page 381: ... A3 11 x 17 Copy speed ADF 1 to 1 LT A4 LEF Thin 60 g m2 or less D037 D038 20 cpm color black white D040 D041 25 cpm color black white Plain 1 74 g m2 or less 2 90 g m2 or less D037 D038 20 cpm color black white D040 D041 25 cpm color black white Middle Thick 105 g m2 or less D037 D038 20 cpm color black white D040 D041 25 cpm color black white Thick 1 169 g m2 or less D037 D038 12 5 cpm color bla...

Page 382: ...6 g m2 35 sheets Postcard Optional paper feed tray 500 sheets x 2 Refer to Supported Paper Sizes Minimum Maximum Tray 1 Tray 2 A5 LEF 8 5 x 11 A3 11 x 17 By pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm Print Paper Size Optional Tray A5 LEF 8 5 x 11 A3 11 x 17 Printing Paper Weight Standard tray 1 60 to 256 g m2 16 to 68 lb Standard tray 2 60 to 169 g m2 16 to 45 lb Optional paper tray 60 to 105 g m2 16 to 28 lb ...

Page 383: ... 73 71 71 78 82 78 82 85 87 93 93 93 93 100 100 100 100 121 115 121 129 122 129 122 155 141 155 141 200 200 200 Zoom 400 400 400 400 Memory H Standard 768 MB Max 1 GB L Standard 512 MB Power Source 120 V 60 Hz 12A or more for North America 220 V 240 V 50 60 Hz 8A or more for Europe ASIA 120V 220 240V Maximum 1440 W or less 1680 W or less Power Consumption Energy Saver H 7 8 W or less H 6 4 W or le...

Page 384: ...made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology Dimensions W x D x H Copier 587 x 655 x 725 mm 23 1 x 25 8 x 28 5 Copier L PFU Right tray 854 x 655 x 1117 mm 33 6 x 25 8 x 44 0 Copier H PFU Right tray Internal finisher 1009 x 655 x 1117 mm 39 7 x 25 8 x 44 0 Weight Less than 85 kg 187 lb without ARDF excluding toner Less than 100 kg 220 lb with ARDF excluding toner ...

Page 385: ...i 2 bits PS3 600 x 600 dpi Fast 1 bit Standard 2 bits 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi Printing speed D037 D038 20 ppm in Plain Middle Thick mode 12 5 ppm in Thick OHP mode depending on paper type D040 D041 25 ppm in Plain Middle Thick mode 12 5 ppm in Thick OHP mode depending on paper type Resident Fonts PCL 5c 6 Standard H 45 Compatible fonts 13 International fonts Adobe PostScript 3 Optional H 136 fonts 24 ...

Page 386: ...Printer D037 D038 D040 D041 1 6 SM Appendix Bluetooth Wireless Optional only for H Network Protocols TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 IPX SPX AppleTalk Auto Switching HDD 60 GB standard only for H ...

Page 387: ...ode 100 200 300 400 600 dpi Grayscales 1 bit or 8 bits pixel each for RGB Scanning Throughput ARDF mode H model only Scan to E mail Folder BW 26 ipm A4LEF BW Text Print 200dpi Compression On MH FC 41 ipm A4LEF FC Text Photo 200dpi Compression Standard Interface Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T 1000 Base T for TCP IP Wireless LAN USB2 0 SD Slot Compression Method B W TIFF MH MR MMR Gray Scale Full Co...

Page 388: ... W 12 x 18 M A3 SEF 297 x 420mm M S1 S1 M A4 SEF 210 x 297mm M A A M A4 LEF 297 x 210mm M S3 S3 M A5 SEF 148 x 210mm M M M A5 LEF 210 x 148mm M A A M A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M S2 S2 M B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M A A M B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S4 S4 M B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M Ledger 11 x 17 A A1 A1 M Letter SEF 8 5 x 11 A A A M Letter LEF 11 x 8 5 A A3 A3 M Legal SEF 8 5 x 14 M A2 A2 M Government ...

Page 389: ...x 13 M M M M Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 M M M M 8 25 x 13 M M M M 11 x 15 M M M M 10 x 14 M M M M Folio SEF 8 x 10 M M M M 8K 267 x 390mm M M M M 16K SEF 195 x 267mm M M M M 16K LEF 267 x 195mm M M M M Custom M M M Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 M Monarch Env 3 875 x 7 5 M C6 Env 114 x 162mm M C5 Env 162 x 229mm M DL Env 110 x 220mm M Remarks A Supported the sensor detects the paper size M Supported the user sp...

Page 390: ...tandard T3 4 Tray 3 4 option DU Duplex Unit Paper Size W x L BT T1 2 T3 4 DU A3 W 12 x 18 M A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A A1 S1 M A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A A A M A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A A3 A3 M A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A A M A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A A A M A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M A2 A2 M B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M A A M B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M A4 A4 M B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M Ledger 11 x 17 M S1 S1 M Letter SEF 8 5 x 11...

Page 391: ...F 7 25 x 10 5 M M M M Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 M S4 S4 M F SEF 8 x 13 M M M M Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 M M M M 8 25 x 13 M M M M 11 x 15 M M M M 10 x 14 M M M M Folio SEF 8 x 10 M M M M 8K 267 x 390mm M M M M 16K SEF 195 x 267mm M M M M 16K LEF 267 x 195mm M M M M Custom M M M Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 M Monarch Env 3 875 x 7 5 M C6 Env 114 x 162mm M C5 Env 162 x 229mm M DL Env 110 x 220mm M Remarks ...

Page 392: ... Not supported 1 4 2 PAPER EXIT Mainframe and optional trays Main Mainframe 1 bin 1 bin tray Shift Shift Tray Side Side Tray Paper Size W x L Main 1 bin Shift Side A3 W 12 x 18 Y A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y B...

Page 393: ...5 x 8 5 Y Y Y Y Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Y Y Y Y Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 Y Y Y Y F SEF 8 x 13 Y Y Y Y Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 Y Y Y Y 8 25 x 13 Y Y Y Y 11 x 15 Y Y Y Y 10 x 14 Y Y Y Y Folio SEF 8 x 10 Y Y Y Y 8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y Custom Y Y Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 Y Y Monarch Env 3 875 x 7 5 Y Y C6 Env 114 x 162 mm Y Y C5 Env 162 x 229 mm...

Page 394: ...e W x L Str Inv Srt Stp 2 3P 4P S4P A3 W 12 x 18 A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y 10 30 Y Y Y A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y 20 50 Y Y A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y 20 50 Y Y Y A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y 10 30 B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y 20 50 B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y 20 50 B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y Ledger 11 x 17 Y Y 10 30 Y Y Y Letter SEF 8 5 x 11 Y Y 20 5...

Page 395: ...x 8 5 Y Y Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Y Y 20 50 Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 Y Y 20 50 F SEF 8 x 13 Y Y Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 Y Y 10 30 Y Y 8 25 x 13 Y Y 10 30 11 x 15 Y Y 10 30 10 x 14 Y Y Folio SEF 8 x 10 Y Y 8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y 10 30 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y 20 50 Custom Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 Monarch Env 3 875 x 7 5 C6 Env 114 x 162 mm C5 Env 162 x 229 mm DL Env 110 x 220 mm...

Page 396: ...L SIZE DETECTION Platen ARDF Platen ARDF Size width x length mm Inches Inches Metric Metric A3 297 x 420 L Y Y 3 Y B4 257 x 364 L Y 3 Y A4 210 x 297 L Y 1 Y Y 3 Y A4 297 x 210 S Y 3 Y Y 3 Y B5 182 x 257 L Y 3 Y B5 257 x 182 S Y 3 Y A5 148 x 210 L 1 Y A5 210 x 148 S 1 Y B6 128 x 182 L B6 182 x 128 S 11 x 17 DLT Y Y 2 Y 2 11 x 15 Y 2 10 x 14 Y 8 5 x 14 LG Y Y 2 8 5 x 13 F4 Y 2 Y 4 Y 4 ...

Page 397: ... 16K L 195 x 267 Y 3 Y 2 16K S 267 x 195 Y 3 Y 2 7 25 x 10 5 Executive Y 10 5 x 7 25 Executive Y 2 1 Use SP4 303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise HLT when the message Can t detect original size shows 2 The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6 016 1 3 The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP4 305 1 4 The machine can detect the paper ...

Page 398: ... and RPCS drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD ROM The PS drivers are provided on the Scanner PostScript Drivers and Utilities CD ROM The printer drivers for Windows NT 4 0 are only for the Intel x86 platform There is no Windows NT 4 0 printer driver for the PowerPC Alpha or MIPS platforms The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers except for Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista Windows 2000...

Page 399: ... 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista A printer management utility for network administrators NIB setup utilities are also available This is provided on the printer drivers CD ROM DeskTopBinder SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Win 95 98 Me NT4 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista A printer management utility for client users A utility for peer to peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP IP network A peer to peer print utility ...

Page 400: ...0 D041 1 20 SM Appendix Win9x ME 2000 XP 2003 NT4 document management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saved in each client s PC This is provided on the scanner drivers CD ROM ...

Page 401: ...s 80 g m2 20 lb Original Standard Position Rear left corner Separation Feed belt and separation roller Original Transport Roller transport Original Feed Order From the top original Copy 32 to 200 Color 32 6 to 200 Supported Magnification Ratios Fax Black white 48 9 to 200 Power Source DC 24V 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption 50 W or less Dimensions W D H 550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm 21 7 x 19...

Page 402: ...to A3 51 2 x 81 2 SEF to 11 x 17 Paper Weight 60 105 g m2 16 28 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb x 2 trays Paper Feed System Feed roller and friction pad Paper Height Detection 4 steps 100 70 30 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc and 5Vdc from the copier printer 120 Vac 120 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed 220 240 Vac 230 V version from the copier pri...

Page 403: ...oles Scandinavia A3 A4 or 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 SEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 11 7 25 x 10 5 Staple mode A3 11 x 17 to B5 8 5 x 11 Paper Weight No punch mode 52 to 256 g m2 14 to 68 lb Punch mode 52 to 163 g m2 14 to 43 lb Staple mode 52 to 128 g m2 14 to 34 lb Label Thick paper OHP cannot be stapled Tray Capacity 500 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or less 250 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or more Staple capacity Single size 50 she...

Page 404: ... 2 x 111 2 or smaller 80g m2 20 lbs Paper Size Standard sizes A6 SEF to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 90 to 305 mm Length 148 to 600 mm Paper Weight 52 256 g m2 14 68 lbs Power Consumption Max 13 W Power is supplied from the mainframe Dimension W x D x H 431 x 477 5 x 107mm 17 2 x 19 1 x 4 3 Weight Approx 2kg 4 4lbs 1 6 6 1 BIN TRAY UNIT D426 Paper Size Standard Size A3 DLT to A5 HLT SEF ...

Page 405: ...lbs Size W x D x H 455 x 530 x 226mm 18 2 x 21 2 x 9 1 6 7 SIDE TRAY D427 Paper Size Standard Size A3 DLT to A5 HLT SEF Paper Weight 60 to 105 g m2 16 to 28 lb Tray Capacity 50 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb A4 Power Source DC 24 V 5 V from the copier Power Consumption Less than 40 W Weight 1 5 kg Size W x D x H 480 x 480 x 170mm 19 2 x19 2 x6 8 ...

Page 406: ......

Page 407: ...APPENDIX OVERVIEW APPENDIX 2 OVERVIEW REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 408: ......

Page 409: ... APPENDIX OVERVIEW 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 2nd carriage 2 1st carriage 3 Original length sensor 4 Lens 5 SBU 6 Inverter roller 16 Vertical transport roller 2 17 Feed roller T1 18 Vertical transport roller 3 19 Tray 2 20 Tray 1 21 Laser unit ...

Page 410: ...2 Registration roller 13 Vertical transport roller 1 14 By pass feed roller 15 Feed roller T1 22 Drum unit 23 Development unit 24 ITB cleaning unit 25 ITB roller 26 Toner bottle 27 ITB Image Transfer Belt unit 28 Inner Tray 2 1 2 PAPER PATH With options 1 DF path 2 Exit path Straight feed out 6 By pass tray path 7 Vertical transport path Tray 2 ...

Page 411: ...ical transport path Tray 1 8 Vertical transport path Tray 3 option 9 Vertical transport path Tray 4 option 10 Inverter path option 11 Exit path Staple Shift Without options 1 DF path 2 Inverter path 3 Duplex path 4 Vertical transport path T1 5 By pass tray path 6 Vertical transport path Tray 2 7 Exit path ...

Page 412: ...d toner collection motor 5 Drum motor CMY 6 Development motor CMY 7 Development clutch K 8 Drum Development motor K 9 Paper feed motor T2 10 Paper feed motor T1 11 By pass motor 12 Registration motor 13 Duplex exit motor 14 PTR contact motor 15 ITB unit motor 16 Duplex entrance motor 17 Fusing Paper exit motor 18 Inverter motor ...

Page 413: ...APPENDIX PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 414: ......

Page 415: ...Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions Symbol keys C Clean R Replace L Lubricant I Inspect Mainframe Item 60K 150K 240K EM Remarks Scanner Reflector C Optics cloth 1st 2nd 3rd Mirrors C Optics cloth Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth alcohol ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth alcohol APS Sensor C Dry cloth PCDU Drum...

Page 416: ...Dry cloth Pressure Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth Entrance Guide Plate C C Alcohol Exit Guide Plate C C Alcohol Stripper Plate C C Alcohol Thermopile C C Dry cloth Others Dust Filter R Item 60K 120K 240K EM Remarks Paper Feed Feed Roller Tray 1 2 R C Damp cloth Friction Pad Tray 1 2 R C Dry cloth Registration Roller C 1 C Damp cloth Never use alcohol Registration Sensor C Dry cloth Vertical Trans...

Page 417: ...amp cloth Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth Paper Exit Paper Exit Roller Damp cloth Inverter Roller C Damp cloth Inverter Relay Roller C Damp cloth Inverter Sensor C Dry cloth Fusing Exit Sensor C Dry cloth 1 The registration roller requires a cleaning maintenance every 60 K total count ARDF D366 Item 120K EM Remarks Sensors C Blower brush Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth alcohol Replace if required W...

Page 418: ...ler R C Dry cloth Bottom Plate Pad C C Dry cloth Paper Feed Guide C C Dry cloth Friction Pad R C Dry cloth Paper Feed Clutch I Two tray Paper Feed Unit D331 Item 60K 120K EM Remarks Paper Feed Roller R C Dry cloth Friction Pad R C Dry cloth Paper Feed Guides C C Dry cloth Relay Rollers C C Dry cloth Bottom Plate Pad C C Dry cloth Relay Clutch I Replace if necessary Paper Feed Clutch I Replace if n...

Page 419: ...mp cloth 3 1 2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield However the total copy print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine s targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions ACV color ratio P J and C O So these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts EM parts ARDF Item 80K 120K 240K...

Page 420: ......

Page 421: ...DIX 4 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 38 42 04 29 2011 Updated SC681 Revised pages 38 thru 42 54 55 09 03 2010 Added SC838 Self Diagnostic Error Clock Generator 67 71 01 09 2009 SC925 70 02 04 2009 SC995 ...

Page 422: ......

Page 423: ... the table A The error involves the fusing unit The machine operation is disabled The user cannot reset the error Turn the main switch off and on Reset the SC set SP5 810 1 Turn the main switch off and on B The error involves one or some specific units The machine operates as usual excluding the related units Turn the operation switch off and on C The error is logged The SC code history is updated...

Page 424: ...re you replace the PCBs If the problem concerns a motor lock first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 100 Scanner 1XX Scanning 190 Unique for a specific model 200 Polygon motor 220 Synchronization control 230 FGATE signal related 240 LD control 2XX Laser ex...

Page 425: ...transport 530 Fan motor 540 Fusing 560 Others 5XX Paper feed Fusing 570 Unique for a specific model 600 Electrical counters 620 Mechanical counters 630 Account control 640 CSS 650 Network 670 Internal data processing 6XX Communication 680 Unique for a specific model 700 Original handling 720 Two tray finisher 7XX Peripherals 740 Booklet finisher 800 Error after ready condition 8XX Controller 820 D...

Page 426: ...ure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64 255 digits 8 bits when scanning the shading plate Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Exposure lamp connector defective Standard white plate dirty Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty 101 D 1 Check and clean the scanner mirror s and scanner lens 2 Check and clean the shading plate 3 Replace the exposure lamp 4 Rep...

Page 427: ... BCU and scanner motor 2 Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor 3 Replace the scanner motor 4 Replace the scanner HP sensor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the ON condition during operation Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Harness between BCU and ...

Page 428: ...ot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control Dirty exposure glass or optics section SBU board defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Scanner motor defective 142 D 1 Clean the exposure glass white plate mirrors and lens 2 Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization 3 Check the harness connection between SBU and BCU 4 Replace the exposure lamp 5 Replace ...

Page 429: ...ective connection between i controller and SBU 001 D 1 Check the connection between i controller and SBU 2 Replace the i controller Detected an error during an access to the i controller Defective i controller board 002 D Replace the i controller board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Copy Data Security Unit error The copy data security board is not detected when t...

Page 430: ...VRAM 195 D 1 Check the serial number with SP5 811 002 2 If the stored serial number is incorrect contact your supervisor 4 1 3 SC 2XX EXPOSURE No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Polygon motor error 1 ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the specified time after turning on or changing speed Defective or disconnected ha...

Page 431: ...le Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Polygon motor error 3 XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH inactive while the laser diode is firing Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor Defective polygon motor driver board 204 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the polygon motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedu...

Page 432: ... does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position K Defective ASIC Lupus Poor connection between i controller and BCU Defective BCU 230 D 1 Check the connection between the controller board and the BCU 2 Replace the BCU 3 Replace the controller board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE OFF error K The PFGATE O...

Page 433: ...ssible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE OFF error Y The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC line position adjustment for end position Y The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts 233 D See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error M The PFGA...

Page 434: ...signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC line position adjustment for start position C 236 D See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE OFF error C The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC line position adjustment for end ...

Page 435: ...djustment fails four consecutive times Pattern sampling error insufficient image density Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment Defective image transfer belt unit Defective PCDU s Defective laser unit 285 D 1 Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDU s 2 Check if each toner bottle has enough toner 3 Replace the ID sensor 4 Replace the image transfer belt unit 5 Repla...

Page 436: ... HVPS CB board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Color development motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque 325 D 1 Adjust the torque properly by replacing or cleaning the development unit 2 Replace the development motor CMY if the load...

Page 437: ...an or yellow TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and development unit for damage 2 Check the drawer connector of the PCDU 3 Replace the development unit 4 Replace the PCDU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 364 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 K 365 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 M 366 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 C 367 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 Y The Vt value...

Page 438: ... cyan or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238 001 to 004 default 2 5V 0 2V Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack TD harness sensor disconnected loose or defective TD sensor defective Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected defective 1 Remove the heat seal from each PCDU 2 Replace the PCDU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshoot...

Page 439: ... Defective drum development motor K Defective harness Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU Defective interlock system 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the drum development motor K 3 Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 397 D Drum motor error CMY The machine detects a High signal from the drum motor CMY for 2 seconds after the drum motor ...

Page 440: ...ensor 2 Clean or replace the ID sensor After replacing the ID sensor input the ID sensor correction coefficient with SP3362 013 and 016 For details refer to ID sensor board in the Replacement and Adjustment section 1 Replace the BCU 2 Replace the ITB unit No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures ITB unit motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two s...

Page 441: ...B unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error Disconnect or defective harness Defective encoder sensor ITB unit installation error Defective ITB unit motor 443 C 1 Connect or replace the harness 2 Replace the encoder sensor 3 Check if the ITB unit is correctly set 4 Replace the ITB unit motor 5 Replace the ITB unit No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Paper...

Page 442: ...tput error An error signal is detected for 0 2 seconds when charging the drum or development High voltage leak Broken harness Defective drum unit or development unit Defective HVPS CB board 491 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit 3 Replace the HVPS CB board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures High voltage power Image transfe...

Page 443: ...efective DRB board Defective BCU 495 D 1 Replace the waste toner collection bottle motor 2 Check or replace the harness 3 Replace the DRB board 4 Replace the BCU 4 1 6 SC5XX PAPER FEED AND FUSING No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 503 B 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction optional Paper Tray Unit 504 B 4th paper tray lift motor malfunction optional Paper Tray Unit ...

Page 444: ... Paper tray feed motor connection loose disconnected or damaged Paper tray feed motor defective 506 B 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the feed motor 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures By pass bottom plate error The signal from the by pass tray HP sensor does not change for 1 0 second after the by pass motor has rotated counterclockwise If t...

Page 445: ...tive ventilation fan front or rear Disconnected or defective harness Defective DRB Defective BCU 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the ventilation fan front SC530 or rear SC531 3 Replace the DRB 4 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Laser unit fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first ...

Page 446: ...he harness 2 Replace the fusing front fan 3 Replace the DRB 4 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Fusing rear fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective fusing rear fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective DRB Defective BCU 534 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Repla...

Page 447: ...4 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Junction gate solenoid fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective junction gate solenoid fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective DRB Defective BCU 536 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the Junction gate solenoid fan 3 Re...

Page 448: ...ible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller warm up error 1 After the main switch is turned on or the cover is closed the increment of the heating roller temperature per 10 seconds is 40 C or less If this condition is detected five times consecutively SC 542 is defined The heating roller temperature does not reach 100 C for 9 seconds after the heating lamp on The heating roller temperatur...

Page 449: ...ller fusing lamp overheat 1 software error The detected fusing temperature stays at 230 C for 1 second Defective PSU Defective BCU Related SC code SC 553 543 A 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 hardware error During stand by mode or a print job the detected heating roller temperature reaches 2...

Page 450: ...error The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal detections This error is defined when the detected zero cross signa...

Page 451: ...g Procedures Heating roller warm up error 2 After the main switch is turned on or the cover is closed the increment of the heating roller temperature per 10 seconds is 40 C or less If this condition is detected five times consecutively SC 552 is defined The heating roller temperature does not reach 100 C for 9 seconds after the heating lamp on The heating roller temperature does not reach the read...

Page 452: ...m Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 hardware error The heating roller thermistor detects 250 C or more Defective PSU Defective BCU Defective fusing control system 554 A 1 Replace the heating roller thermistor 2 Replace the PSU 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller lamp consecutive full power ...

Page 453: ...Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly This SC is activated only when SP1159 001 is set to 1 default 0 Paper jam in the fusing unit 559 A Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit Then make sure that the fusing unit is clean and has no ...

Page 454: ...ys at 230 C or more for 1 second Defective PSU Defective BCU 563 A 1 Replace the pressure roller thermistor center 2 Replace the PSU 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller overheat 3 hardware error The pressure roller thermistor center detects 250 C or more Defective PSU Defective BCU Defective fusing control system 564 A 1 Replace the p...

Page 455: ...ller thermister error 4 The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor end does not reach 0 C for 20 seconds Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor end Defective pressure roller thermistor end Related SC code SC 541 571 A 1 Check that the pressure roller thermistor end is firmly connected 2 Replace the pressure roller thermistor end No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubl...

Page 456: ... PSU 3 Replace the BCU 4 1 7 SC6XX DEVICE COMMUNICATION No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 610 D Mechanical counter error K 611 D Mechanical counter error FC This SC is only for NA models The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987 001 is set to 1 Disconnected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter 1 Check or replace the mechanical counter N...

Page 457: ...f one of following conditions occurs The BCU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on When the BCU does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral 100ms after sending a command to it The BCU resends the command The BCU does not receive an OK signal after sending the command 3 times Cable problems BCU problems PSU problems in the m...

Page 458: ...2 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line no ACK signal was received within 100 ms 633 CTL B Serial line between the optional counter device the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Proced...

Page 459: ... file of the expanded authentication module is broken There is no DESS module in the machine No expanded authentication module Defective SD card No DESS module 1 Install the expanded authentication module 2 Install the SD card 3 Install the DESS module 02 D Version error The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct Incorrect module version 1 Install the correct file of the expa...

Page 460: ...s Disconnected telephone line Disconnected modem board Check and set the correct user name SP5816 156 and password SP5816 157 004 Incorrect modem setting Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting Same as 001 Check and set the correct AT command SP5819 160 005 Communication line error The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or defective connection Same ...

Page 461: ...ror The ready signal from the engine board is not detected Defective engine board Replace the engine board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 671 CTL D Engine board mismatch error Engine board and controller mismatch detected Wrong engine board installed Wrong controller board installed Check the type of engine board and controller board 1 Replace the BCU 2 Replace t...

Page 462: ...ard Check the connection of the GND line for the ITB unit Check the physical condition of this harness and replace it if it is damaged Replace the RFID controller board Replace the BCU board 061 064 D RFID Communication error due to the following Defective RFID reader and writer Defective RFID controller board Electrical noise Replace the toner cartridge for the affected color See table below Repl...

Page 463: ...ss that connects RFID controller board and BCU board If it is damaged replace it Check the physical condition of the RFID controller board and BCU board If they are damaged replace them No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 682 D Memory chip at TD sensor Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory ch...

Page 464: ...or The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization A device status error occurs during I2C bus communication The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage Loose connection Defective BCU Defective LD controller board 1 Turn the main switch off and on 2 Check the cable connection 3 Replace the laser unit 4 Replace the BCU board 4 1 8 SC7XX PE...

Page 465: ...safety sensor 740 B 1 Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above 2 Replace the stapler unit 3 Replace the finisher main board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Finisher stapler movement motor error D038 D041 Motor overload Loose connection of the stapler unit HP sensor Loose connection of the stapler unit movement motor Defective stapler uni...

Page 466: ...ailure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Punch HP sensor disconnected defective Punch motor disconnected or defective Punch motor overload due to obstruction 760 D 1 Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP sensor 2 Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism 3 Replace the punch slider unit 4 Replace the punch unit 5 Replace the finisher main board ...

Page 467: ...ine does not detect correct voltage from the paper edge detection sensor Defective connector Defective paper edge detection sensor Defective DA or AD converter 787 D 1 Replace the punch slider unit 2 Replace the punch unit No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 788 D Paper size sensor error without side tray D038 D041 789 B Paper size sensor error with side tray D038 D04...

Page 468: ...ront jogger fence HP sensor 2 Replace the front jogger motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 791 D Rear jogger motor error without side tray D038 D041 794 B Rear jogger motor error with side tray D038 D041 The machine does not detect a correct signal from the rear jogger fence HP sensor at power on The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure i...

Page 469: ...connection Motor overload Defective pick up roller HP sensor 1 Replace the pick up contact motor 2 Replace the pick up roller HP sensor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Belt roller solenoid error Disconnected harness Defective belt roller position sensor Defective belt roller solenoid 796 B 1 Check the harness connection 2 Replace the belt roller position sensor 3 ...

Page 470: ...ossible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Output tray motor error Output tray motor damaged Output tray motor overload Loose connection of the Output tray motor Defective output tray motor 799 D Replace the output tray unit 4 1 9 SC8XX OVERALL SYSTEM No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Energy saving I O sub system error The energy saving I O sub system detects an error...

Page 471: ...19 CTL C Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system processing One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel 0x5032 HAIC P2 error 0x696e init died 0x766d vm_pageout VM is full 554C USB error System program defective Controller board defective Optional board defective 1 Replace controller firmware No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedur...

Page 472: ...ailed error code Program address CPU Memory Error System firmware problem Defective RAM DIMM Defective controller 0702 0709 070A 1 Reinstall the controller system software 2 Replace the RAM DIMM 3 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 821 CTL D Self diagnostics error ASIC XXXX Detailed error code ASIC error The write verify check error has occurre...

Page 473: ...ll the controller system firmware 2 Replace the RAM DIMM 3 Replace the controller board Video bridge device error 1 ASIC The CPU does not detects the video bridge device Defective I F between the video bridge device and i controller 50A1 Replace the i controller Video bridge device error 1 ASIC The CPU detects the video bridge device but detects error data from the video bridge device Defective I ...

Page 474: ...ble Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 823 CTL B Self diagnostic error NIB XXXX Detailed error code 6101 MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM 6104 PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized 6105 PHY IC loop back error An error occurred during the loop back test for the PHY IC on the controller Rep...

Page 475: ...leshooting Procedures 826 CTL D 15FF Self diagnostic Error RTC optional NVRAM RTC error Defective the RTC device 1501 Replace the i controller The RTC device is not detected RTC defective NVRAM without RTC installed Backup battery discharged 15FF Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 827 CTL D Self diagnostic error...

Page 476: ...Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 828 CTL D Self diagnostic error ROM XXXX Detailed error code 0101 Check sum error 1 The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked If the check sum of the program is incorrect this SC code is displayed No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 829 CTL B Self diagnosis error optional RAM XXXX D...

Page 477: ... could not be checked Replace the VBCU 50B1 Could not initialize or read the bus connection Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the mother board 50B2 Value of the SSCG register is incorrect Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the mother board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 838 CTL B Self diagnostic error Clock Generator A v...

Page 478: ...51 CTL B 1 Turn the main switch off and on 2 Replace the IEEE1394 interface board 3 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established though the wireless LAN board is detected Loose connection 853 CTL B Check the connection No Type Details Symptom Possible...

Page 479: ...856 CTL B 1 Check the connection 2 Replace the wireless LAN Bluetooth card No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures USB interface error The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error Defective USB driver Loose connection 857 CTL B 1 Check the connection 2 Replace the USB board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Encryption unit err...

Page 480: ...urs while the NVRAM data is encrypted 2 Defective NVRAM on the controller board 1 Replace the NVRAM NVRAM data encryption error 2 An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted 30 Defective controller board 1 Replace the controller board Other error A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted 30 Same as SC991 No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Encrypti...

Page 481: ...d HDD has not been completed 9 Power failure during the data encryption 1 Initialize the HDD Data read write error The DMAC error is detected twice or more 10 Same as SC863 No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Initialization error The controller detects that the hard disk fails HDD not initialized Defective HDD 860 CTL B 1 Reformat the HDD 2 Replace the HDD No Type...

Page 482: ... Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Bad sector number error The number of bad sectors in the HDD goes over 101 Defective HDD 862 CTL D 1 Format the HDD with SP5 832 002 2 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly Defective HDD Defective controller 863 CTL D 1 Replace th...

Page 483: ...oting Procedures HDD Access error An error is detected while operating the HDD Defective HDD 865 CTL D Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures SD card authentication error A correct license is not found in the SD card SD card data is corrupted 866 CTL B Store correct data in the SD card No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures SD c...

Page 484: ...eplace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Address book error An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a network Defective software program Defective HDD Incorrect path to the server 870 CTL B 1 Initialize the address book data SP5 846 050 2 Initialize the user information SP5 832 006 3 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Pos...

Page 485: ...Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Delete All error 1 HDD An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit D362 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit SD card not installed Defective HDD 874 CTL D 1 Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit D362 2 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Trou...

Page 486: ...cryption module not installed 002 1 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 0 is off 2 Install the DESS module Log Data Error 3 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data 003 1 Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 2 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 0 is off Log Data Error 4 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data 004 Initialize the HDD wit...

Page 487: ... not installed 877 CTL D 1 Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card D362 2 Check and reinstall the SD card D362 No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures TPM system authentication error The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM security chip Incorrect updating for the system firmware Defective flash ROM on the controller board 878 CTL D Replace the controlle...

Page 488: ...e Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Printer application error An error is detected in the printer application program Defective software Unexpected hardware resource e g memory shortage 920 CTL D 1 Software defective switch off on or change the controller firmware if the problem is not solved 2 Insufficient memory No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Printer font error ...

Page 489: ...us codes are displayed below the SC code 925 CTL B Refer to the four procedures below Recovery from SC 925 List of HDD status codes Display Meaning 1 HDD not connected 2 HDD not ready 3 No label 4 Partition type incorrect 5 Error returned during label read or check 6 Error returned during label read or check 7 filesystem repair failed 8 filesystem mount failed 9 Drive does not answer command 10 In...

Page 490: ...r and scanned documents will not be erased The first time that the network gets access to the machine the management information must be configured again this will use a lot of time 3 Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832 11 do these steps 4 Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery Then erase them 5 I...

Page 491: ...1 at the end of the SC table No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Software continuity error The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation However unlike SC 990 the object of the error is continuity of the software Software program error Internal parameter incorrect insufficient working memory 991 CTL C This SC is not displayed on the LCD logging only No...

Page 492: ...rrect type Incorrect model controller installed 004 1 Replace the controller with the correct model No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Application function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends abnormally Software including the software configuration defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is...

Page 493: ...FF 2 Check if the RAM DIMM and ROM DIMM are correctly connected 3 Reinstall the controller system firmware 4 Replace the controller Note 1 If a problem always occurs in a specific condition for example printer driver setting image file the problem may be caused by a software error In this case the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist Please understand tha...

Page 494: ......

Page 495: ...APPENDIX PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS APPENDIX 5 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 496: ......

Page 497: ... was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization 1 Do the developer initialization again when done in SP mode Reinstall the engine main firmware if the result is the same 2 Turn the main switch off and on when done at unit replacement 6 Vt error Vt is more than 0 7V when Vcnt is 4 3V 1 Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed 2 Defective TD sensor ...

Page 498: ...en and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs 5 1 2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK RESULT Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check 00000000 YYCCMMKK SP3 012 001 to 010 Process Control Self check Result No Result Description Possible Causes Action 11 Successfully completed Process control self check successfully completed Check the...

Page 499: ...coefficient K5 maximum minimum error When the K5 is more than the value of SP3 362 003 or less than the value of SP3 362 004 the error 54 is displayed ID sensor pattern density is too high or low ID sensor or shutter is defective Same as 53 55 Gamma error Maximum Gamma is out of range 5 0 Gamma ID sensor pattern density is too high Hardware defective Same as 53 56 Gamma error Minimum Gamma is out ...

Page 500: ...010 Vsg Adjustment Result No Result Description Possible Causes Action 1 O K Vsg adjustment is correctly done 2 ID sensor adjustment error Vsg cannot be adjusted within 4 0 0 5V Dirty ID sensors toner dust or foreign material Dirty image transfer belt Scratched image transfer belt Defective ID sensors Poor connection Defective BCU 1 Clean the ID sensors 2 Check the ITB cleaning unit Clean or repla...

Page 501: ... shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD It shows which color has an error M Y or C No Result Description Note 0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done 1 Completed successfully Line position adjustment has correctly been done 2 Cannot detect patterns ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line position adjustment See Note 3 Fewer lines on the pattern th...

Page 502: ......

Page 503: ...APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE APPENDIX 6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 504: ......

Page 505: ...e fusing unit speed Crow marks Check the humidity condition and adjust the transfer bias if necessary No Yes Yes Location of the image problem shifted Copy Yes Print No No Yes No Image Quality Copy or Print Color related A B b222t501 No problem on pattern Font problem Image data missing Especially problems related to the above symptoms and if no problem is found on the test pattern it may be relat...

Page 506: ... is close to its life end the developer or the cleaning blade of the drum unit wears out causing vertical color lines bands or dirty background Check the related color unit and replace it if necessary Considerable Symptoms A B No No All colors Color missing Can the problem be duplicated Possible Symptoms Check Points Mirror position of related colour located in the laser unit i Controller or BCU b...

Page 507: ...s 1 refer to Countermeasure list for color registration errors 5 Put some A3 DLT paper on the by pass tray When you print a test pattern use the by pass tray to feed the paper 6 Print out test pattern 7 with SP2 109 003 7 Check the printed output with a loupe 8 If there are no color registration errors on the output the line position adjustment is correctly done If not refer to the countermeasure ...

Page 508: ...Defective BCU 1 Replace the laser unit 2 Replace the BCU The sub scan registrations of M C Y are shifted by more than 20 mm from the sub scan registration of K Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective BCU 1 Replace the image transfer belt 2 Replace the drum motor 3 Replace the BCU The main scan registration is shifted by more than 0 66 mm but only at the central area of the im...

Page 509: ...eck Possible cause Countermeasure Do SP2 111 001 or 002 After Executing SP2 111 001 Result 1 in SP2 194 007 Result 2 or 3 Line pattern detection failure in SP2 194 010 011 012 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure White image Abnormal image Low density Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern Defective BCU 1 Replace the high voltage power supply unit 2 Do the forced p...

Page 510: ...place the BCU The sub scan registrations of M C Y are shifted by more than 1 4mm from the sub scan registration of K No defective component Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective BCU 1 Do SP2 111 003 again 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace the drum motor 4 Replace the BCU The main scan registration is shifted by more than 0 66 mm but only at the central area of the...

Page 511: ...easure The main scan registration of K is shifted Abnormal SP setting value of main scan K Adjust the value with SP2 101 001 The main scan length of K is shifted Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length detection K Adjust the value with SP2 102 001 and 003 Note The setting value of these SPs should be same After Executing SP2 111 001 Result 0 in SP2 194 007 Result Color registration errors in...

Page 512: ...eplace the ID sensor 3 Replace the BCU 4 Adjust the value with SP2 182 004 to 021 The sub scan registrations of M C Y are shifted Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective ID sensor Defective BCU Incorrect SP value 1 Replace the image transfer belt 2 Replace the ID sensor 3 Replace the drum motor 4 Replace the BCU 5 Adjust the value with SP2 182 022 to 039 The skew of M C Y is ...

Page 513: ...justment see Replacement and Adjustment Drive Unit Gear Unit for details 2 Reinstall or replace the PCDU 3 Check or replace the drive unit 6 1 3 IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS If a defect occurs in the image at one of these intervals the related component may be defective Development roller 32 mm PTR Paper Transfer Roller 75 0 mm Drum 94 2 mm Fusing belt 157 1 mm ...

Page 514: ......

Page 515: ...APPENDIX JAM DETECTION APPENDIX 7 JAM DETECTION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 516: ......

Page 517: ... CODE Indicates the jam code SIZE Indicates the paper Size Code TOTAL Indicates the total counter SP7 502 001 DATE indicates the date when the jam occurred Paper Size Code Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size 05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF 06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF 14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF 38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF 44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF 132 A3 SEF 172 HLT SEF 133 A4 SEF 255 Others 134 A5 SEF ...

Page 518: ... 4 Y 7504 8 Bypass ON Paper is not fed from the by pass tray A2 7504 9 Duplex ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit Z 7504 11 Vertical Transport 1 ON Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from tray 1 A1 7504 12 Vertical Transport 2 ON Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect paper from tray 2 Y 7504 17 Registration ON Registration sensor does not detect paper A2 7504 18 Fusing Entra...

Page 519: ...ort sensor 1 does not turn off A1 A2 7504 52 Vertical Transport Sensor2 Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off Y 7504 53 Vertical Transport Sensor3 Vertical transport sensor 3 does not turn off Y 7504 57 Registration Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off B 7504 58 Fusing Entrance Sensor Fusing entrance sensor does not turn off C 7504 59 Fusing Exit Sensor Fusing exit sensor does not ...

Page 520: ...1 R2 7504 242 Feed Out Belt Motor The mainframe detects the lock signal from the paper transport motor of the internal finisher R1 R2 7504 243 Stapler Motor The mainframe detects the lock signal from the staple motor of the internal finisher R1 R2 7504 244 Jogger Motor The mainframe detects the lock signal from the front or rear jogger motor of the internal finisher R1 R2 7504 245 Pick Up Roller L...

Page 521: ...otor of the punch unit R1 R2 7504 252 FIN Stapler Position Error The stapler unit stays on the jogger end fence so that stapling is disabled R1 R2 7504 253 FIN Job Data Error Unexpected job data is sent to the internal finisher from the mainframe R1 R2 The jam location display depends on where a paper jam is detected at power on ARDF Original Jam Jam Code SP Display Description LCD Display 7505 1 ...

Page 522: ...ction D037 D038 D040 D041 7 6 SM Appendix Jam Code SP Display Description LCD Display off 7505 54 Registration OFF Registration sensor does not turn off P 7505 55 Paper Exit OFF Exit Sensor does not turn off P ...

Page 523: ...Jam Detection SM Appendix 7 7 D037 D038 D040 D041 Appendix Jam Detection Sensor Locations ...

Page 524: ......

Page 525: ...APPENDIX ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS APPENDIX 8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 526: ......

Page 527: ...n Symptom Open Open Cover is displayed SW4 Duplex Unit Open Switch L CN232 2 Shorted Open cover cannot be detected ID Sensor Front A CN214 8 9 Open Shorted SC258 SC400 ID Sensor Center A CN214 6 7 Open Shorted SC258 SC400 Sxx ID Sensor Rear A CN214 2 3 Open Shorted SC258 SC400 Sxx ID Sensor Shutter Sensor H CN232 4 Open Shorted SC400 Open Jam A2 Jam17 Sxx Registration Sensor L CN214 11 Shorted Jam...

Page 528: ... A1 Jam11 Sxx Vertical Transport Sensor 1 L CN219 10 Shorted Jam A1 A2 Jam51 Open Paper end is not detected when there is no paper in the paper tray Sxx Sxx Paper End Sensor 1 2 L CN214 17 19 Shorted Paper end is detected when there is paper in the paper tray Open Jam Y Jam12 Sxx Vertical Transport Sensor 2 L CN219 15 Shorted Jam Y Jam52 Open Shorted Paper size error SWx Tray 1 Paper Size Switch L...

Page 529: ...ed Paper size error Sxx By pass HP Sensor H CN221 21 Open Shorted SC508 Open Jam B Jam18 Sx Fusing Entrance Sensor L CN214 14 Shorted Jam C Jam58 Open Jam Z Jam27 Sx Duplex Entrance Sensor L CN221 24 Shorted Jam Z Jam67 Open Jam Z Jam25 Sx Duplex Exit Sensor L CN221 27 Shorted Jam Z Jam65 Sx TD Sensor K A CN212 B9 B11 Open Shorted SC372 Sx TD Sensor M A CN212 A9 A11 Open Shorted SC373 Sx TD Sensor...

Page 530: ...ected when the waste toner bottle is set SWx PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch L CN211 7 Shorted Toner collection bottle is detected when the waste toner bottle is not set Open Used toner near full indicated when it is not near full Sxx ITB Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor H CN211 4 Shorted Used toner near full cannot be detected when the waste toner bottle is nearly full SWx Tray 2 Paper...

Page 531: ...233 9 Open Shorted SC571 Open Jam C Jam20 S3 Paper Exit Sensor L CN227 21 Shorted Jam C Jam60 Sxx Original Length Sensor 1 A CN206 2 Open Shorted Original paper size cannot be detected Sxx Original Length Sensor 2 A CN206 5 Open Shorted Original paper size cannot be detected Open SC120 Sxx Scanner HP Sensor H CN205 2 Shorted SC121 Sxx Platen Cover Sensor L CN205 5 Open Shorted Platen cover open ca...

Page 532: ...response 5V power to the PSU is not supplied FU103 2A 250V 2A 250V 5V power to the scanner heater and tray heater is not supplied FU4 5A 250V 5A 250V 5V power to the i controller and BCU is not supplied FU5 5A 250V 5A 250V 5V power to the BCU is not supplied FU6 5A 250V 5A 125V 5VS power to the i controller is not supplied FU7 10A 125V 10A 125V 24VS power to the BCU is not supplied FU8 10A 125V 10...

Page 533: ...ON HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 1 12 08 2008 SP1001 189 190 07 15 2010 Added SP5104 190 05 07 2009 SP5113 200 201 04 16 2009 SP5420 207 05 21 2009 SP5801 222 05 21 2009 SP5824 248 250 11 12 2009 SP5894 359 12 20 2010 A new BitSwitch 6 7 has been added ...

Page 534: ......

Page 535: ... registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode 001 Tray Plain 600dpi ENG 002 Tray Thick1 600dpi ENG 003 Tray M Thick 600dpi ENG 004 By pass Plain 600dpi ENG 005 By pass Thick1 600dpi ENG 006 By pass Thick2 600dpi ENG 007 By pass Thick3 600dpi ENG 008 By pass M Thick 600dpi ENG 009 Duplex Plain 600dpi ENG 010 Duplex M Thick 600dpi ENG 9 to 9 0 0 0 1 mm step 011 Tray...

Page 536: ...anging the laser main scan start position for each mode 001 By pass ENG 002 Paper Tray 1 ENG 003 Paper Tray 2 ENG 004 Paper Tray 3 ENG 005 Paper Tray 4 ENG 006 Duplex ENG 4 to 4 0 0 0 1 mm step Paper Buckle Paper Buckle Adjustment Tray Location Paper Type Paper Type N Normal TH Thick 1003 Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing 001 Tray1 Plai...

Page 537: ...600dpi ENG 012 Duplex Plain 600dpi ENG 013 Duplex M Thick 600dpi ENG 014 Tray1 Plain 1200dpi ENG 015 Tray1 Thick1 1200dpi ENG 016 Tray1 M Thick 1200dpi ENG 017 Tray1 Thick1 1200dpi ENG 018 Tray234 Thick1 1200dpi ENG 019 Tray234 M Thick 1200dpi ENG 020 By pass Plain 1200dpi ENG 021 By pass Thick1 1200dpi ENG 022 By pass Thick2 1200dpi ENG 023 By pass Thick3 1200dpi ENG 024 By pass M Thick 1200dpi E...

Page 538: ...F 1 Flicker Control ON 1103 Fusing Idling Fusing Idling Adjustment 011 Idling Start Temp ENG 0 to 75 75 1 deg step 012 Forced Idling Stop ENG 0 to 1 0 1 step 013 Forced Idling Stop Temp ENG 100 to 180 100 1 deg step 014 Minimum Idling Time ENG 0 to 10 2 1 sec step 016 Extra Idling Time L ENG Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed for each environment 0 to 60 0 1 sec step Each en...

Page 539: ...p 010 Fusing Upper Limit Temp ENG 0 to 100 15 1 deg step 011 Offset Feed Start ENG 0 to 100 25 1 deg step 012 Offset Feed Start M Thick ENG 0 to 100 10 1 deg step 031 Offset Feed Start 1200dpi ENG 0 to 100 30 1 deg step 033 Offset Feed Start Glossy ENG 0 to 100 15 1 deg step 1105 Fusing Temperature Fusing Temperature Adjustment Printing Mode Roller Type Color Simplex Duplex Roller Type Center and ...

Page 540: ... the thresholds to determine if the machine is at the heating roller target temperature during warm up 013 Panel Off Mode Center ENG 100 to 150 130 1 deg step 014 Panel Off Mode Ends ENG 100 to 150 130 1 deg step 015 Panel Off Mode P Roller ENG 135 to 165 150 1 deg step 016 Low Power Center ENG 017 Low Power Ends ENG 30 to 100 40 1 deg step 018 Low Power P Roller ENG 30 to 155 100 1 deg step 019 O...

Page 541: ... Duplex Ends 125 to 175 140 1 deg step 046 Thick 1 FC Simplex Center ENG 047 Thick 1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 048 Thick 1 FC Duplex Center ENG 049 Thick 1 FC Duplex Ends ENG 050 Thick 1 BW Simplex Center ENG 051 Thick 1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 052 Thick 1 BW Duplex Center ENG 053 Thick 1 BW Duplex Ends 135 to 180 150 1 deg step 054 Thick 2 FC Simplex Center ENG 055 Thick 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 135 to 180 ...

Page 542: ... 067 SP 2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 068 SP 2 FC Duplex Center ENG 069 SP 2 FC Duplex Ends ENG 070 SP 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 071 SP 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 072 SP 2 BW Duplex Center ENG 073 SP 2 BW Duplex Ends ENG 125 to 175 160 1 deg step 074 SP 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 075 SP 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 076 SP 3 FC Duplex Center ENG 077 SP 3 FC Duplex Ends ENG 078 SP 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 079 SP 3 BW Simplex...

Page 543: ...ENG 088 Thick 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 135 to 180 160 1 deg step 089 Thick 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 090 Thick 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 091 Thick 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 092 Thick 3 BW Simplex Ends ENG 135 to 180 165 1 deg step 109 M Thick FC Simplex Center ENG 110 M Thick FC Duplex Center ENG 111 M Thick BW Simplex Center ENG 112 M Thick BW Duplex Center ENG 113 M Thick FC Simplex Ends ENG 114 M Thick FC...

Page 544: ...n2 FC Simplex Center ENG 133 F Plain2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 134 F Plain2 BW Simplex Center ENG 135 F Plain2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 110 to 160 125 1 deg step 136 F Middle Thick FC Simplex Center ENG 137 F Middle Thick FC Simplex Ends ENG 138 F Middle Thick BW Simplex Center ENG 139 F Middle Thick BW Simplex Ends ENG 110 to 160 130 1 deg step 142 Glossy Plain1 Center ENG 143 Glossy Plain1 Ends ENG 110 to...

Page 545: ... Center ENG 155 SP 4 BW Duplex Ends ENG 135 to 180 150 1 deg step 156 SP 5 FC Simplex Center ENG 157 SP 5 FC Simplex Ends ENG 158 SP 5 FC Duplex Center ENG 159 SP 5 FC Duplex Ends ENG 160 SP 5 BW Simplex Center ENG 161 SP 5 BW Simplex Ends ENG 162 SP 5 BW Duplex Center ENG 163 SP 5 BW Duplex Ends ENG 135 to 180 160 1 deg step 164 SP 6 FC Simplex Center ENG 165 SP 6 FC Simplex Ends ENG 166 SP 6 FC ...

Page 546: ...p 180 F SP 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 181 F SP 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 182 F SP 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 183 F SP 3 BW Simplex Ends ENG 110 to 160 125 1 deg step Fusing Temperature Display Fusing Temperature Display Heating or Pressure 1106 Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers 001 Fusing Roller Center 20 to 250 0 1 deg step 002 Fusing Roller Ends 10 to 250 0 1 deg step Th...

Page 547: ...1 sec step 002 Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109 001 Stop Time ENG 5 to 30 20 1 sec step 003 Specifies the time for measuring the nip 1112 Environmental Correct Fusing Temp Threshold Low ENG 10 to 23 17 1 deg step 001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature condition Temp Threshold High ENG 24 to 40 30 1 deg step 002 Specifies the threshold temperature for ...

Page 548: ...ime AF Recovery ENG 0 to 60 10 1 sec step 003 Specifies the time for keeping the target temperature after recovery SP1105 083 without any jobs 004 Wait Time AF Job ENG 0 to 60 10 1 sec step 005 P Roll Thresh AF Ready ENG 006 P Roll Thresh AF Job ENG 0 to 160 100 1 deg step 008 ON OFF Time SW Timer ENG 0 to 999 300 1 sec step 1115 Stand by Idling Interval ENG 0 to 240 60 1 min step 001 Specifies th...

Page 549: ... can be adjusted with SP1116 019 Ends Temp 2 226 ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 013 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 019 Center Temp 3 226 ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 014 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is less than 226 mm The...

Page 550: ...ure correction that is set with SP1116 012 and 013 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper Control Time 3 226 ENG 0 to 250 30 1 sec step 020 Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 014 and 015 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding th...

Page 551: ...Other 226 ENG 034 Center Temp 3 Other 226 ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 035 Ends Temp 3 Other 226 ENG 10 to 10 5 1 deg step 036 Center Temp 4 Other 226 ENG 037 Ends Temp 4 Other 226 ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 1117 Idling Time After Heater OFF After Ready ENG 0 to 4 4 1 sec step DFU 001 Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after reaching the ready temperature After Job End ENG 0 to 4 0 1 sec st...

Page 552: ...o 60 0 1 deg 008 Pattern 2 MM H Roll ENG 15 to 0 5 1 deg 009 Pattern 2 MM P Roll ENG 0 to 60 0 1 deg 010 Pattern 2 HM H Roll ENG 15 to 0 5 1 deg 011 Pattern 2 HM P Roll ENG 0 to 60 0 1 deg 1119 Fusing FF Correct 001 Plain Center ENG 002 Plain Ends ENG 0 to 100 60 1 003 Thin Center ENG 004 Thin Ends ENG 0 to 100 50 1 005 M Thick Center ENG 006 M Thick Ends ENG 007 Thick1 Center ENG 008 Thick1 Ends ...

Page 553: ...rect Low ENG 100 to 100 10 1 022 Envir Correct High ENG 023 Envir Correct Center ENG 024 FF Correct Ends ENG 100 to 100 0 1 FF Correct Time 025 FF Correct Time ENG 0 to 60 0 1 sec FF Control thresh 026 Offset Center ENG 027 Offset Ends ENG 0 to 50 25 1 deg FF Start Time 028 Fgate Timer FC Full ENG 0 to 10000 1900 1msec 029 Fgate Timer BW Full ENG 0 to 10000 5300 100msec 030 Fgate Timer BW Full ENG...

Page 554: ...t Mode Feed Condition ENG 0 or 2 0 1 001 Selects the paper feed timing 0 Productivity priority 1 Fusing quality priory 1159 Fusing Jam Detection SC Display ENG 0 or 1 0 1 001 Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam three times SC detection 0 No detection 1 Detection 1801 Motor Speed Adjust FA 001 Regist Mot 60 Thick ENG 002 Regist Mot 120 ENG 4 to 4 0 3 0 05 step 003 Bk OpcDevMot 120 ENG 00...

Page 555: ...11 Feed1 CW60 Thick ENG 012 Feed1 CW120 ENG 013 Feed1 CCW60 Thick ENG 014 Feed1 CCW120 ENG 015 Feed12 CW60 Thick ENG 016 Feed12 CW120 ENG 017 Feed12 CCW60 Thick ENG 018 Feed12 CCW120 ENG 019 By pass 60 Thick ENG 020 By pass 120 ENG 2 to 2 0 3 0 05 step 021 Reverse CW60 Thick ENG 022 Reverse CW120 ENG 023 Reverse CCW60 Thick ENG 024 Reverse CCW120 ENG 2 to 2 0 0 05 step 025 Duplex Entrance 60 ENG 0...

Page 556: ...CW60 1200dpi ENG 037 Feed12 CCW60 1200dpi ENG 038 By pass 60 1200dpi ENG 2 to 2 0 3 0 05 step 039 Reverse CW60 1200dpi ENG 040 Reverse CCW60 1200dpi ENG 2 to 2 0 0 05 step 041 Fusing Thin Nrml Mid ENG 6 to 6 0 05 0 01 step 042 BkOpcDevMot 60 1200dpi ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 01 step 043 TransferMot 60 1200dpi ENG 4 to 4 0 0 01 step 1802 CPM Setting 001 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1803 Sub Mag ADJ 001 Plain 600dp...

Page 557: ...djustment 0 Successfully done 2 Sampling failure 3 Insufficient detection number 003 Auto Execution ENG 0 or 1 1 1 Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off 0 Off 1 On 1907 Inverter Timing Adj 001 Inverter Position Adj ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Feed Timing Adj 002 R Tray J Gate SOL ON ENG 003 R Tray J Gate SOL OFF ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 1950 Fan Cooling Time Set 001 Development Fan1 ENG...

Page 558: ...arge bias DC component is automatically adjusted during process control therefore adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode SP3 041 1 Default ON is activated When deactivating process control mode with SP3 041 1 the values in these SP modes are used for printing 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain C ENG 003 Plain M ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 005 Thick 2 FINE Bk ENG 006 Thick 2 FINE C ENG...

Page 559: ...11 Thick 2 FINE M ENG 012 Thick 2 FINE Y ENG 0 to 3000 2100 10V step Charge AC A LL Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL Color 2007 Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment Low temperature and Low humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 002 Environmental Target C ENG 0 to 3000 710 10 ųA step 003 Environmental Target M ENG 0 to 3000 760 10 ųA step 004 E...

Page 560: ...NG 002 Environmental Target C ENG 003 Environmental Target M ENG 0 to 3000 790 10 ųA step 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 850 10 ųA step Charge AC A MH Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH Color 2010 Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment Middle temperature and High humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 002 Environmental Target C ENG 0 to ...

Page 561: ...ltage control type 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Process control 1 Manual control AC voltages are decided with SP2006 2013 Envir Correct PCU 001 Envir Range FC Display ENG Displays the environmental condition which is measured in absolute humidity 1 to 5 1 step 1 LL LL 4 3 g m3 2 ML 4 3 ML 11 3 g m3 3 MM 11 3 MM 18 0 g m3 4 MH 18 0 MH 24 0 g m3 5 HH 24 0 g m3 HH 002 Forced Setting ENG Selects the environmenta...

Page 562: ...lays the current temperature 0 to 100 0 1 deg step 008 Relative Humidity Display ENG Displays the current relative humidity 0 to 100 0 1 RH step 009 Absolute Humidity Display ENG Displays the absolute humidity 0 to 100 0 0 01 g m3 step 010 Previous Envir Range Display ENG Displays the previous environmental condition which is measured in absolute humidity 1 to 5 1 step 1 LL 2 ML 3 MM 4 MH 5 HH 011...

Page 563: ...6 Sub A Humid Thresh ENG 0 to 99 12 1 g m3 step 007 Main Temp Change Thresh ENG 0 to 99 10 1 deg step 008 Main RH Change Thresh ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 009 Main AH Change Thresh ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m3 step 010 Sub Temp Change Thresh ENG 0 to 20 1 0 1 deg step 011 Sub RH Change Thresh ENG 0 to 50 5 1 RH step 012 Sub AH Change Thresh ENG 0 to 20 1 0 1 g m3 step 013 Non use Time ENG 0 to 1440 360 10 m...

Page 564: ...he new laser optics housing unit 001 Bk Main Scan Dot ENG 002 C Main Scan Dot ENG 003 M Main Scan Dot ENG 004 Y Main Scan Dot ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 013 Bk Sub Scan Line ENG 014 C Sub Scan Line ENG 015 M Sub Scan Line ENG 016 Y Sub Scan Line ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 2102 Magnification Adjust DFU 001 Main Mag Bk High Spd ENG 003 Main Mag Bk Low Spd ENG 004 Main Mag C High Spd ENG 006 M...

Page 565: ...NG 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 80 to 120 100 1 step 2105 LD Power Adjust Process Speed Color Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed Each LD power setting is decided by process control High Speed 120 mm sec Low Speed 60 mm sec 001 Bk High Speed ENG 002 C High Speed ENG 003 M High Speed ENG 004 Y High Speed ENG 009 Bk Low Speed ENG 010 C Low Speed ENG 011 M Low Speed ENG 012 Y L...

Page 566: ...1 1 1 step Test Pattern 2109 Generates the test pattern using COPY Window tab in the LCD 003 Pattern Selection 0 to 23 0 1 step 0 None 1 Vertical Line 1dot 2 Vertical Line 2dot 3 Horizontal 1dot 4 Horizontal 2dot 5 Grid Vertical Line 6 Grid Horizontal Line 7 Grid pattern Small 8 Grid pattern Large 9 Argyle Pattern Small 10 Argyle Pattern Large 11 Independent Pattern 1dot 12 Independent Pattern 2do...

Page 567: ... the color density for the test pattern 0 to 15 15 1 step 0 Lightest density 15 Darkest density 2111 Line Pos Ajust 001 Execute Mode a Executes the fine line position adjustment twice If this SP is not completed NG is displayed do SP2111 003 first and then try this SP again 002 Execute Mode b Executes the fine line position adjustment once If this SP is not completed do SP2111 003 first and then t...

Page 568: ...Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement and Adjustment section 001 Pulse C ENG 002 Pulse M ENG 003 Pulse Y ENG 75 to 75 0 1 pulse step 2118 Skew Adjustment 001 Execute C ENG 002 Execute M ENG 003 Execute Y ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117 These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC285 occurs For details ...

Page 569: ...step P Sensor Test 2141 Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Average ENG TM Sensor Test DFU 005 Average Front ENG 006 Average Center ENG 007 Average Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step P Sensor Test DFU 2142 Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor chec...

Page 570: ...automatic line position adjustment 001 Minimum ENG TM Sensor Test DFU 005 Minimum Front ENG 006 Minimum Center ENG 007 Minimum Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step P Sensor Test DFU 2144 Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Maximum 2 ENG TM Sensor Test DFU 005 Ma...

Page 571: ...tion Color Area FA 2150 Adjusts the magnification for each area The main scan 297 mm is divided into 8 areas Area 1 is at the front side of the machine left side of the image and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine right side of the image Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print 1 pulse 1 16...

Page 572: ...ion for LD 0 255 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 131 M Area0 ENG 256 to 255 0 1sub dot step 132 M Area1 ENG 133 M Area2 ENG 134 M Area3 ENG 135 M Area4 ENG 136 M Area5 ENG 137 M Area6 ENG 138 M Area7 ENG 139 M Area8 ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 183 Y Area0 ENG 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 184 Y Area1 ENG 185 Y Area2 ENG 186 Y Area3 ENG 187 Y Area4 ENG Adjusts the ...

Page 573: ...e of the machine left side of the image and area 14 is at the front side of the machine right side of the image For Cyan and Yellow area 1 is at the front side of the machine right side of the image and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine left side of the image 001 Bk Area 0 ENG 002 Bk Area 1 ENG 003 Bk Area 2 ENG 004 Bk Area 3 ENG 005 Bk Area 4 ENG 006 Bk Area 5 ENG 007 Bk Area 6 ENG 008 B...

Page 574: ...rea 4 ENG 038 C Area 5 ENG 039 C Area 6 ENG 040 C Area 7 ENG 041 C Area 8 ENG 042 C Area 9 ENG 043 C Area 10 ENG 044 C Area 11 ENG 045 C Area 12 ENG 046 C Area 13 ENG 047 C Area 14 ENG This is for the synchronizing detection board 50 to 150 100 1 step 048 C Area 15 ENG This is out of the image area 50 to 150 100 1 step 065 M Area 0 ENG This is for the synchronizing detection board 50 to 150 100 1 ...

Page 575: ...rea 8 ENG 074 M Area 9 ENG 075 M Area 10 ENG 076 M Area 11 ENG 077 M Area 12 ENG 078 M Area 13 ENG 079 M Area 14 ENG 080 M Area 15 ENG This is out of the image area 50 to 150 100 1 step 097 Y Area 0 ENG This is for the synchronizing detection board 50 to 150 100 1 step 098 Y Area 1 ENG 099 Y Area 2 ENG 100 Y Area 3 ENG 101 Y Area 4 ENG 102 Y Area 5 ENG 103 Y Area 6 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step ...

Page 576: ...G 110 Y Area 13 ENG 111 Y Area 14 ENG 112 Y Area 15 ENG This is out of the image area 2160 Vertical Line Width DFU 001 600dpi Bk ENG 002 600dpi C ENG 003 600dpi M ENG 004 600dpi Y ENG 005 1200dpi Bk ENG 006 1200dpi C ENG 007 1200dpi M ENG 008 1200dpi Y ENG 10 to 15 15 1 step 2180 Line Pos Adj Clear 001 Color Regist 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Mag Correction DFU ...

Page 577: ...rrection value in the main scan direction M Cor Subdot indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan direction Bk Black M Magenta C Cyan Y Yellow 001 Paper Int Mag Subdot Bk ENG 32768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 002 Mag Cor Subdot Bk ENG 32768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 003 Skew C ENG 004 Bent C ENG 005 M Scan Shift Left C ENG 006 M Scan Shift Center C ENG 007 M Scan Shift Right C ENG 008 S Sca...

Page 578: ...ft M ENG 024 M Scan Shift Center M ENG 025 M Scan Shift Right M ENG 026 S Scan Shift Left M ENG 027 S Scan Shift Center M ENG 028 S Scan Shift Right M ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 029 M Cor Dot M ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 030 M Cor Subdot M ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 031 Paper Int Mag Subdot M ENG 032 Mag Cor Subdot M ENG 033 M Left Mag Subdot M ENG 034 M Right Mag Subdot M ENG 32768 to 327...

Page 579: ... dot step 048 M Cor Subdot Y ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 049 Paper Int Mag Subdot Y ENG 050 Mag Cor Subdot Y ENG 051 M Left Mag Subdot Y ENG 052 M Right Mag Subdot Y ENG 32768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 053 S Cor 600 Line Y ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 054 S Cor 600 Subdot Y ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step 055 S Cor 1200 Line Y ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 056 S Cor 1200 Subdot Y ENG 1 to 1 0 0 ...

Page 580: ... 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 005 M Scan High Subdot C ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 008 M Scan Low Dot C ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 009 M Scan Low Subdot C ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 010 M Scan High Dot M ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 011 M Scan High Subdot M ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 014 M Scan Low Dot M ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 015 M Scan Low Subdot M ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 016 M Scan High D...

Page 581: ...o 1 0 0 001 line 038 S Scan Low Dot Y ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line 039 S Scan Low Subdot Y ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 040 C Skew ENG 041 M Skew ENG 042 Y Skew ENG 50 to 50 0 1um 2190 Line Pos Adj Mode 001 Paper Int Mag Subdot Bk ENG 002 Paper Int Mag Subdot C ENG 003 Paper Int Mag Subdot M ENG 004 Paper Int Mag Subdot Y ENG DFU 0 or 1 1 1 boolean step 005 M Scan Mag Subdot C ENG 006 M Scan Mag Subdot ...

Page 582: ...lter Front b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 006 ch 0 Filter Rear a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step 007 ch 0 Filter Rear a2 ENG 131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step 008 ch 0 Filter Rear b0 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 009 ch 0 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 010 ch 0 Filter Rear b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 011 ch 1 Filter Front a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 12...

Page 583: ... step 025 ch 2 Filter Front b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 026 ch 2 Filter Rear a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step 027 ch 2 Filter Rear a2 ENG 131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step 028 ch 2 Filter Rear b0 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 029 ch 2 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 030 ch 2 Filter Rear b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 031 Q Format Selection ENG 0 to...

Page 584: ...justs the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end Page Interrupt BW FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step 004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during job Page Interrupt FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step 005 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs Page Standby BW FC ...

Page 585: ...G 1 to 1440 300 1 minute step 009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions Temp Change 2 ENG 0 to 100 10 1deg step 011 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment Mode a adjustment twice The timing for line position adjustment depends on th...

Page 586: ...0 1 times step 010 Error Counter C ENG 011 Error Counter M ENG 012 Error Counter Y ENG 0 to 9 0 1 step 0 Not done 1 Completed successfully 2 Cannot detect patterns 3 Fewer lines on the pattern than the target 4 Not used 5 Out of the adjustment range 6 to 9 Not used MUSIC Exe Time 2197 DFU 001 Execution Time ENG 10 to 40 20 10ms step 002 TM Sensor Position ENG 48 2 to 500 48 2 0 1mm step 2198 Music...

Page 587: ... ENG 004 Y Normal Spd ENG 009 Bk Low Spd ENG 010 C Low Spd ENG 011 M Low Spd ENG 012 Y Low Spd ENG 0 to 200 100 1 step Increasing this value makes the image density darker Dev DC Bias Fixed Development DC Bias Adjustment 2229 Adjusts the development bias Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control therefore adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control SP3 041 ...

Page 588: ... RH step 003 Absolute Humidity 0 to 100 0 1 g m3 step 2302 Env Correct Transfer Environmental Correction Image Transfer Belt Unit Forced Setting ENG 0 to 6 0 1 step 002 Sets the environment condition manually 0 Automatic environment control 1 LL Low temperature Low humidity 2 ML Middle temperature Low humidity 3 MM Middle temperature Middle humidity 4 MH Middle temperature High humidity 5 HH High ...

Page 589: ...lue between MH and HH 007 Temp Threshold ENG 5 to 30 5 1 deg step Paper Size Correction 2308 Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction 001 Threshold 1 ENG 0 to 350 290 1 mm step Threshold 1 paper Paper is detected as S1 size 002 Threshold 2 ENG 0 to 350 250 1 mm step Threshold 2 paper Threshold 1 Paper is detected as S2 size 003 Threshold 3 ENG 0 to 350 194 1 mm step Threshold 3 pa...

Page 590: ...60 5 1 μA step 2326 Transfer Roller CL Bias Transfer Roller Cleaning Bias Adjustment Positive before and after JOB ENG 0 to 2100 250 10 V step 001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller Negative before and after JOB ENG 10 to 400 100 10 step 002 Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller...

Page 591: ...rrent for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Standard Spd C ENG 0 to 60 22 1 μA 002 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Standard Spd M ENG 0 to 60 25 1 μA 003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Standard Sp...

Page 592: ...rd ENG 1 to 50 42 1 step 003 Image Transfer Low ENG 1 to 50 38 1 step Common FC Env Correction Table 004 Image Transfer Standard Spd BK ENG 1 to 50 25 1 step 005 Image Transfer Standard Spd C ENG 1 to 50 46 1 step 006 Image Transfer Standard Spd M ENG 1 to 50 43 1 step 007 Image Transfer Standard Spd Y ENG 1 to 50 45 1 step 012 Image Transfer Low Speed Bk ENG 1 to 50 26 1 step 013 Image Transfer L...

Page 593: ... to 200 25 1 μA step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 200 28 1 μA step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 200 13 1 μA step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 200 14 1 μA step Plain T SizeCorrect BW 2411 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Pa...

Page 594: ...250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 4000 230 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 190 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 4000 290 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 100 to 4000 190 5 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Pape...

Page 595: ... size Paper width Plain T SizeCorrect FC 2412 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard l 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 100 to 4000 100 5 step S1...

Page 596: ...dth 012 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 4000 320 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 100 to 4000 190 5 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S4 ENG 100 to 4000 285 5 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1st Side S4 ENG 100 to 4000 190 5 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 016 Paper Transfe...

Page 597: ...Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 50 30 1 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S2 ENG 1 to 50 23 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 50 9 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper wi...

Page 598: ...50 10 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S4 ENG 1 to 50 15 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1st Side S4 ENG 1 to 50 35 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2st Side S4 ENG 1 to 50 13 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 017 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S5 ENG 1 to 50 29 1 step 150 mm S5 size Paper wi...

Page 599: ...d 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 50 30 1 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S2 ENG 1 to 50 37 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 50 16 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1st S2 ENG 1 to 50 32 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 008 Pa...

Page 600: ...0 7 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1st Side S4 ENG 1 to 50 22 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2st Side S4 ENG 1 to 50 4 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 017 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S5 ENG 1 to 50 12 1 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 018 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S5 ENG 1 to 50 7 1 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 019 Pap...

Page 601: ...e bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Plain T Edge Correction Plain Paper Trailing Edge Correction 24...

Page 602: ...tandard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 2430 Plain Environment Correction 003 Paper Transfer BW Standard 1st ENG 1 to 50 39 1 step 004 Paper Transfer BW Standard 2nd ENG 1 to 50 26 1 step 005 Paper Transfer FC Standard 1st ENG 1 to 50 39 1 step 006 Paper Transfer FC Standard 2nd ENG 1 to 50 33 1 step 009...

Page 603: ... 1st ENG 0 to 200 13 1 μA step Thin L Edge Correction Thin Paper Leading Edge Correction 2471 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2472 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st EN...

Page 604: ...00 100 5 step Thin Switch Timing T Edge 2474 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step 2480 Thin Env Correct Table 003 Paper Transfer BW Standard 1st ENG 1 to 5...

Page 605: ... Trailing Edge Correction 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 2488 Glossy Trailing Edge Correction 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step 2489 Glossy Environment Correction Table 003 Paper Transfer BW 1st ENG 1 to 50 17 1 step 005 Paper Transfer FC 1st ENG 1 to 50 21 1 step Thick 1 Bias BW 2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black and whi...

Page 606: ...e SP values Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd S1 ENG 100 to 4000 100 5 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1st S2 ENG 100 to 4000 125 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 4000 225 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 150 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width 0...

Page 607: ...ed by these SP values Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd S1 ENG 100 to 4000 100 5 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1st S2 ENG 100 to 4000 110 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 4000 215 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 115 5 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Pap...

Page 608: ...re multiplied by these SP values Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 50 30 1 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1st S2 ENG 1 to 50 36 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 50 21 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer 1st S3 ENG 1 to 50 40 1 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper width ...

Page 609: ...2507 are multiplied by these SP values Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 50 30 1 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1st S2 ENG 1 to 50 49 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 50 21 1 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer 1st S3 ENG 1 to 50 50 1 step 250 mm S3 size 194 mm Paper ...

Page 610: ... sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2522 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Thick 1 Switch Timing L Edge 2522 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 ...

Page 611: ...area and the image area Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 2530 Thick 1 Env Correct Table 003 Paper Transfer BW 1st ENG 1 to 50 17 1 step 004 Paper Transfer BW 2nd ENG 1 to 50 15 1 step 005 Paper Transfer FC 1st ENG 1 to 50 29 1 step 006 Paper Transfer FC 2nd ENG 1 to 50 19 1 step Thick 2 Bias BW 2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfe...

Page 612: ...eading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Thick 2 Switch Timing L Edge 2572 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 30 0 2mm step...

Page 613: ... ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 2580 Thick 2 Env Correct Table 003 Paper Transfer BW 1st ENG 0 to 50 36 1 step 004 Paper Transfer BW 2nd ENG 0 to 50 13 1 step 005 Paper Transfer FC 1st ENG 0 to 50 23 1 step 006 Paper Transfer FC 2nd ENG 0 to 50 19 1 step OHP Bias BW 2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 ...

Page 614: ... erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step OHP T Edge Correct OHP Trailing Edge Correction 2623 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step OHP Trailing ...

Page 615: ... 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 200 13 1 μA step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 200 15 1 μA step Thick 3 L Edge Correct Thick 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction 2654 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Thick 60 mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2655 00...

Page 616: ...adjusted with SP2657 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Thick 3 Trailing Edge Correction 2657 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Thick 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 2660 Thick 3 Env...

Page 617: ... Bias FC Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 200 25 1 uA step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 200 28 1 uA step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 200 11 1 uA step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 200 14 1 uA step 2721 M Thick L Edge Correct Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 P...

Page 618: ...2724 M Thick SwTiming T Edge Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 100 0 2 uA step 2730 M Thick Env Correct Table Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 003 Paper Transfer BW Standard 1st ENG 1 to 50 23 1 uA step 004 Paper Transfer BW Standard 2nd ENG 1 to 50 26 1 uA step 0...

Page 619: ...ep 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 200 11 1 μA step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 200 13 1 μA step SP 1 Bias FC 2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 200 25 1 μA step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 200 28 1 μA step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to ...

Page 620: ...0 165 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1st S2 ENG 100 to 4000 150 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 4000 190 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 175 5 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 4000 230 5 step 250 mm S2 siz...

Page 621: ...er Standard 1st S5 ENG 100 to 4000 200 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 018 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S5 ENG 100 to 4000 340 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 019 PaperTransfer Low 1st S5 ENG 100 to 4000 210 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 020 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S5 ENG 100 to 4000 420 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width SP1 2 3 T Size Correct FC 2762 Adjusts the size correction coefficient f...

Page 622: ...Paper Transfer Low 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 4000 215 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 160 5 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 4000 215 5 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 011 PaperTransfer Low 1st S3 ENG 100 to 4000 175 5 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 012 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S3 EN...

Page 623: ...width 019 PaperTransfer Low 1st S5 ENG 100 to 4000 230 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width 020 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S5 ENG 100 to 4000 565 5 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width SP1 2 3 T Size Env Correct BW 2763 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001...

Page 624: ... 50 10 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 50 15 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 011 PaperTransfer Low 1st S3 ENG 1 to 50 12 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 012 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 50 13 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 1 to 50 10 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width ...

Page 625: ... ENG 1 to 50 13 1 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width SP1 2 3 T Size Env Correct FC 2764 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Tra...

Page 626: ...50 9 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 011 PaperTransfer Low 1st S3 ENG 1 to 50 29 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 012 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 50 18 1 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 1 to 50 29 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S4 ENG 1 to 50 7 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 015...

Page 627: ...r transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2772 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 1 Switch Timing L Edge 2772 Adjusts th...

Page 628: ...tandard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 005 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 1 Switch Timing T Edge 2774 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Pap...

Page 629: ...ial paper 1 in black and white mode Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Normal 1st ENG 0 to 200 15 1 μA step SP 4 Bias FC 2787 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Normal 1st ENG 0 to 200 15 1 μA step SP4 5 6 T Size Correct BW 2791 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the pa...

Page 630: ... paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Normal S1 ENG 100 to 4000 100 5 step S1 size 290 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Normal S2 ENG 100 to 4000 110 5 step 290 mm S2 size 250 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Normal S3 ENG 100 to 4000 115 5 step 250 mm S2 size 194 mm Paper width 01...

Page 631: ...4 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Normal S4 ENG 1 to 50 27 1 step 194 mm S4 size 150 mm Paper width 017 Paper Transfer Normal S5 ENG 1 to 50 20 1 step 150 mm S5 size Paper width SP4 5 6 T Size Env Correct FC 2794 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm s...

Page 632: ...per Transfer ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 4 Switch Timing L Edge 2796 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step SP4 T Edge Correct Special 1 Paper Trailing Edge Correction 2797 Adjusts the correction to the pap...

Page 633: ...he current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in black and white mode Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 200 20 1 μA step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 200 11 1 μA step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 200 13 1 μA step SP2 Bias FC 2807 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special pape...

Page 634: ... to 400 100 5 step SP 2 SW Timing L Edge 2822 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step SP 2 T Ed...

Page 635: ... Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 2830 SP 2 Env Correct Table Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 003 Paper Transfer BW Standard 1st ENG 1 to 50 23 1 uA step 004 Paper Transfer BW Standard 2nd ENG 1 to 50 26 1 uA step 005 Paper Transfer FC Standard 1st ENG 1 to 50 38 1 uA step 006 Paper Tran...

Page 636: ...cial 5Paper Leading Edge Correction 2845 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2833 and SP2837 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2846 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 5 Switch Timing L Edge 2846 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the ...

Page 637: ...discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 100 0 2 mm step 2849 SP 5 Env Correct Table 003 Paper Transfer BW 1st ENG 1 to 50 17 1 uA step 005 Paper Transfer FC 1st ENG 1 to 50 29 1 uA step SP3 Bias BW 2852 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black and wh...

Page 638: ...ransfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Special 3 Switch Timing Lead Edge 2872 Adjus...

Page 639: ...aper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 3 Sw Timing T Edge 2874 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ...

Page 640: ...fer roller for special paper 6 in black and white mode Normal 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 200 15 1 μA step SP 6 Bias FC 2887 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in full color mode Normal 120mm sec Low 60mm sec 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 200 15 1 μA step SP6 L Edge Correct Special 5Paper Leading Edge Correction 2895 Adjusts the correction to...

Page 641: ...he paper trailing edge in each mode SP2883 and SP2887 are multiplied by these SP values Normal 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2898 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step SP 6 Sw Timing T Edge 2898 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the imag...

Page 642: ...C ENG 0to 200 70 10 msec step 004 DevRev Bk ENG 0to 200 200 10 msec step ImageTrunsferRevTime 2904 Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor reverses after job end DFU 003 All ENG 0 to 200 50 10 msec step Drum Stop Angle 2906 DFU 001 Color ENG 002 Bk ENG 0 to 359 0 1 deg step GainAdj TransferM Gain Adjustment of Image Transfer Belt Motor 2908 DFU 001 120 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 0 1 ste...

Page 643: ...tep 0 GAIN High speed 1 GAIN Low speed 2916 GainAdj ColorOpcM 001 120 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 GAIN High speed 1 GAIN Low speed 002 60 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 GAIN High speed 1 GAIN Low speed 2920 Transfer Motor Ctrl 001 TransferMotorCtrl ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 FG Control 1 ENC Control 002 SC443 Count ENG 0 to 10 0 1 step 2921 ITB Speed Control 001 On Off ENG 0 or 1 0 1 0 Disavailable 1 Av...

Page 644: ...5 65535 1 step 041 Amp Error Counter ENG 0 or 1000 0 1 step 050 Amp Coeff 1 120 ENG 0 or 65535 18681 1 step 051 Amp Coeff 2 120 ENG 0 or 65535 26048 1 step 052 Amp Coeff 3 120 ENG 0 or 65535 31468 1 step 053 Amp Coeff 1 60 ENG 0 or 65535 9341 1 step 054 Amp Coeff 2 60 ENG 0 or 65535 13024 1 step 055 Amp Coeff 3 60 ENG 0 or 65535 15734 1 step 056 Pha Coeff 1 ENG 0 or 65535 35987 1 step 057 Pha Coef...

Page 645: ...s SP affects SP2931 to SP2939 001 Bias ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 2940 Charge Bias On Timing 001 T1 Standard Speed ENG 500 to 1000 0 10 msec step 002 T1 Low Speed ENG 500 to 1000 80 80 msec step 2941 Dev Bias Down Mode 001 T5 Bk Normal ENG 140 to 140 0 10 msec step 002 T7 FC Normal ENG 140 to 140 0 10 msec step 003 T5 Bk Low ENG 210 to 210 0 10 msec step 004 T7 FC Low ENG 210 to 210 0 10 msec st...

Page 646: ...1 0 1 step Executes the toner density adjustment manually Check the result with SP3 325 001 after executing this SP 003 Procon BF ACC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC The type of process control is selected with SP3 041 004 004 With Full MUSIC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally done at the same time as MUSIC This SP does the M...

Page 647: ...thers were successful See the Error Condition Tables in the Process Control Error section for details 001 History Latest ENG 002 Result Latest 1 ENG 003 Result Latest 2 ENG 004 Result Latest 3 ENG 005 Result Latest 4 ENG 006 Result Latest 5 ENG 007 Result Latest 6 ENG 008 Result Latest 7 ENG 009 Result Latest 8 ENG 010 Result Latest 9 ENG 11111111 to 99999999 1 step 3013 TD Sen Initial Setting Dev...

Page 648: ...re displayed in the order Y C M Bk e g 1 Y 2 C 1 M 1 Bk Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded 3015 Forced Toner Supply Forced Toner Supply Color 001 Execution ALL 002 Execution COL 003 Execution Bk 004 Execution C 005 Execution M 006 Execution Y 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit Forced Toner Supply Cntl Forced Toner Supply Setting Color 3016 ...

Page 649: ... C ENG 008 Upper Counter M ENG 009 Upper Counter Y ENG 010 Lower Counter Bk ENG 011 Lower Counter C ENG 012 Lower Counter M ENG 013 Lower Counter Y ENG 0 to 99 0 1 times step TD Sensor Initial Set Developer Initialization Setting 3021 Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization DFU 001 Agitation Time Bk ENG 002 Agitation Time C ENG 003 Agitation Time M ENG...

Page 650: ...e 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 006 Execution Flag C ENG 007 Execution Flag M ENG 008 Execution Flag Y ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Flag OFF 1 Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor initialization 3041 Process Control Type Voltage Control ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED Use the fixed values for the charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2 005 and SP2 229 1 CONTROL 001 Enab...

Page 651: ...ner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number Initial ENG 0 to 9 3 1 time step 002 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer initialization 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied ...

Page 652: ...G 0 to 9 3 1 time step 005 Not used Repeat Number Job End ENG 0 to 9 4 1 time step 006 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled R...

Page 653: ...ty when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment T1 Bias Bk ENG 0 to 80 10 1 µA step 013 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black T2 Bias C ENG 0 to 80 10 1 µA step 014 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan T3 Bias M ENG 0 to 80 10 1 µA step 015 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta T4 Bias Y ENG 0 to 80 10 1 µA step 016 Adjusts the image transfe...

Page 654: ...he detected development gamma values SP3611 003 exceed the target values SP3611 007 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 C Pattern LD DUTY Y ENG 0 to 15 15 1 step 021 Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 004 exceed the target values SP3611 008 by...

Page 655: ...M ENG 004 Toner Replenishment Y ENG 1 to 600 235 1 g step 005 008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner 005 Toner Consumption Bk ENG 006 Toner Consumption C ENG 007 Toner Consumption M ENG 008 Toner Consumption Y ENG 0 to 3000 0 0 001 g step 009 012 Displays the remaining amount of each color toner These are calculated by the operating times of the toner supply motors 009 Toner Remainin...

Page 656: ... toner end Delta Vt Vt Vtref When both this SP and SP3 101 026 occur at same time toner end is determined 022 025 Displays the total delta Vt Vt Vtref value for each color These are calculated by pixel counting 022 Delta Vt Sum Bk ENG 023 Delta Vt Sum C ENG 024 Delta Vt Sum M ENG 025 Delta Vt Sum Y ENG 0 to 655 0 0 01 V step 026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold ENG 0 to 255 10 1 V step 028 031 Displays the ...

Page 657: ...ep 044 Delta Vt Threshold BF NE ENG Adjusts the delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end before toner near end is detected 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step 045 Delta Vt Sum Threshold BF NE ENG Adjusts the total delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end before toner near end is detected 0 to 255 10 1 V step 046 049 Displays the latest mohno off time 046 Bottle Motor Off Time Bk ENG 047 Bottle Motor Off Time C ENG 048 Bottle Moto...

Page 658: ...ecovery 001 Repeat Bk ENG 002 Repeat C ENG 003 Repeat M ENG 004 Repeat Y ENG 1 to 20 5 1 time step TE Count m Display 3131 Display the number of toner end detections for each color 001 Bk ENG 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 0 to 99 0 1 time step TD Sensor Vt Display 3201 Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 002 Current C ENG 003 Current M ENG 004 Current Y E...

Page 659: ...t Bk ENG 006 Low Speed Shift C ENG 007 Low Speed Shift M ENG 008 Low Speed Shift Y ENG 0 to 5 0 29 0 01 V step Vtcnt Display Set 3221 Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 002 Current C ENG 003 Current M ENG 004 Current Y ENG 2 to 5 4 0 01 V step 005 008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization DFU 005 Initial Bk ENG 006...

Page 660: ...06 Initial C ENG 007 Initial M ENG 008 Initial Y ENG 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 009 012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color DFU 009 Pixel Correction Bk ENG 010 Pixel Correction C ENG 5 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 011 Pixel Correction M ENG 012 Pixel Correction Y ENG 5 to 5 0 0 01 V step Vtref U Lower Set DFU 3223 Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each colo...

Page 661: ... 1 to 15 4 0 1 wt step 012 Upper Sensitivity ENG Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 to 0 5 0 44 0 001 V wt step 013 Lower Sensitivity ENG Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 to 0 5 0 209 0 001 V wt step 014 Toner Density Between H M ENG 1 to 10 3 5 0 1 wt step 015 Toner Density Between M L ENG 1 to 10 3 5 0 1 wt step Vtref Correct Pixel DFU 3224 Adjusts t...

Page 662: ...rection ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 1 wt step 012 Upper Limit TC Display Bk ENG 013 Upper Limit TC Display C ENG 014 Upper Limit TC Display M ENG 015 Upper Limit TC Display Y ENG 1 to 15 9 5 0 1 wt step 016 Process Control Execution Threshold M ENG 0 to 255 50 1 time step 017 High Coverage Threshold H ENG 018 High Coverage Threshold L ENG Adjusts the threshold of the high coverage 0 to 100 20 1 step 019 Proc...

Page 663: ...pd ENG 0 01 to 5 1 0 01 step 007 MSEC V ENG 0 001 to 1 0 08 0 001 step 011 PID I K ENG 012 PID I C ENG 013 PID I M ENG 014 PID I Y ENG 0 to 100 0 5 0 01 step 015 PID I K ENG 016 PID I C ENG 017 PID I M ENG 018 PID I Y ENG 0 to 100 8 0 01 step 019 PID I LowSpd ENG 020 PID P LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 step 021 AWILOW K ENG 022 AWILOW C ENG 023 AWILOW M ENG 024 AWILOW Y ENG 1 to 1 0 125 0 0001 step 0...

Page 664: ... SMITH Y ENG 0 to 2 0 8 0 01 step 035 SMITH LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 step 041 ANC Hori K ENG 042 ANC Hori C ENG 043 ANC Hori M ENG 044 ANC Hori Y ENG 0 to 10 2 8 0 01 step 045 ANC Ver K ENG 046 ANC Ver K ENG 047 ANC Ver K ENG 048 ANC Ver K ENG 0 to 10 1 9 0 01 step 049 ANC Hori LowSpd ENG 050 ANC Ver LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 6 0 01 step 051 ANCG Long A K ENG 052 ANCG Long A C ENG 053 ANCG Long A M ENG ...

Page 665: ...step 060 ANCG Long B LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 35 0 01 step 061 AWPNI K ENG 062 AWPNI C ENG 063 AWPNI M ENG 064 AWPNI Y ENG 10 to 10 0 1 0 001 step 071 PID ENG 080 PIX TBL 1 ENG 081 PIX TBL 2 ENG 082 PIX TBL 3 ENG 083 PIX TBL 4 ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 step 084 PIX TBL 5 ENG 0 to 5 0 96 0 01 step 085 PIX TBL 6 ENG 0 to 5 0 9 0 01 step 086 PIX TBL 7 ENG 0 to 5 0 86 0 01 step 087 PIX TBL 8 ENG 088 PIX TBL 9 ENG ...

Page 666: ...tep 103 PID I Nrml to Low ENG 104 PID I Low to Nrml ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 step Toner Supply Setting 3231 Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color DFU 001 Conversion Coeff Bk ENG 002 Conversion Coeff C ENG 003 Conversion Coeff M ENG 004 Conversion Coeff Y ENG 0 5 to 9 99 3 33 0 01 step 3232 T Supply Coeff Setting DFU 001 Vt Proportion Bk ENG 002 Vt Proportion C ENG 003 Vt Proport...

Page 667: ...um Times C ENG 015 Vt Sum Times M ENG 016 Vt Sum Times Y ENG 1 to 255 20 1 time step 3233 Pixel Prop Coeff 2 Set DFU 001 Correction Coeff 1 ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 002 Correction Coeff 2 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 5 0 01 step 003 Correction Coeff 3 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 step 004 Correction Coeff 4 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 25 0 01 step 005 Correction Coeff 5 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 5 0 01 step 3234 Pixel Prop Coeff 3 Set DFU...

Page 668: ...ENG 0 7 to 1 3 1 0 01 step 009 Vt Integral Value Bk ENG 010 Vt Integral Value C ENG 011 Vt Integral Value M ENG 012 Vt Integral Value Y ENG 255 to 255 0 0 01 step Toner Supply Consum Display DFU 3236 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color 001 Latest Bk ENG 002 Latest C ENG 003 Latest M ENG 004 Latest Y ENG 0 to 40000 0 0 1 mg step Developer Agitation Setting 3237 Displ...

Page 669: ...n Bk ENG 002 Consumption C ENG 003 Consumption M ENG 004 Consumption Y ENG 005 Consumption Bk ENG 006 Consumption C ENG 007 Consumption M ENG 008 Consumption Y ENG 0 to 1 0 05 0 01 V step 009 012 Threshold for development gamma rank 009 P Rank 1 Threshold ENG 0 to 2 0 15 0 01 step 010 P Rank 2 Threshold ENG 0 to 2 0 1 0 1 step 011 P Rank 3 Threshold ENG 2 to 0 0 1 0 1 step 012 P Rank 4 Threshold E...

Page 670: ...8 005 Offset Bk ENG 006 Offset C ENG 007 Offset M ENG 008 Offset Y ENG These are additional values for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at process control 0 to 255 140 1 V step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 0 001 x SP3 241 001 to 004 these values LD Power Setting 3242 Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control 001 Coefficient Bk ENG...

Page 671: ... ENG 003 Latest Pixcel M ENG 004 Latest Pixcel Y ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color 0 to 9999 0 1 cm2 step 005 008 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction Average S is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251 017 005 Average S Bk ENG 006 Average S C ENG 007 Average S M ENG 008 Average S Y ENG 0 to 100 5 0 0...

Page 672: ... 005 to 016 017 Total Page Setting S ENG 1 to 100 10 1 sheet step 018 Total Page Setting M ENG 1 to 500 10 1 sheet step 019 Total Page Setting L ENG 1 to 999 50 1 sheet step 020 022 Adjusts the threshold for SP3 251 024 to 027 020 Total Page Setting S2 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 sheet step 021 Total Page Setting M2 ENG 1 to 500 10 1 sheet step 022 Total Page Setting L2 ENG 1 to 999 50 1 sheet step 024 027 ...

Page 673: ... Displays the ID sensor diffusion offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 005 Voffset dif C ENG 006 Voffset dif M ENG 007 Voffset dif Y ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 008 010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 008 Voffset TM Front ENG 009 Voffset TM Center ENG 010 Voffset TM Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 3321 Vsg Adjustment Execution 010 P TM Sensor All Execute the ID sensor initia...

Page 674: ...3323 Vsg Adjust Result Ifsg DFU 001 Ifsg Bk ENG 002 Ifsg C ENG 003 Ifsg M ENG 004 Ifsg Y ENG 0 to 50 0 0 1 mA step 005 Ifsg TM Front ENG 006 Ifsg TM Center ENG 007 Ifsg TM Rear ENG 0 to 50 0 0 1 mA step 3324 Vsg Adjustment Set DFU 003 Vofset Error Counter ENG 0 to 99 0 0 1 time step 004 Vofset Threshold ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 V step 005 Vsg Upper Threshold ENG 0 to 5 4 5 0 01 V step 006 Vsg Lower Thres...

Page 675: ...and sensor for Rear 001 Latest ENG 002 Latest 1 ENG 003 Latest 2 ENG 004 Latest 3 ENG 005 Latest 4 ENG 006 Latest 5 ENG 007 Latest 6 ENG 008 Latest 7 ENG 009 Latest 8 ENG 010 Latest 9 ENG 111 to 999 999 1 step 9 Unexpected error 3 Offset voltage error 2 Vsg adjustment value error 1 O K 3361 ID Sensor Sensitivity Display Not Used 003 K2C Latest ENG 004 K5C Latest ENG 3362 ID Sn Sensitivity DFU 003 ...

Page 676: ...iffusion Correction ENG 0 75 to 1 35 1 0 01 step 016 K2 Check ENG 0 to 1 0 25 0 001 step 3363 ID Pattern Timing Setting DFU 001 Scan YCMBk ENG Adjusts the detection timing for the process control pattern 500 to 500 0 1 mm step 002 Detection Delay Time ENG Adjusts the timing when the paper transfer unit is kept away from the image transfer belt 0 to 2500 400 1 msec step 003 Delay Time ENG Adjusts t...

Page 677: ...t Coeff Bk 006 Color Correct Coeff C 007 Color Correct Coeff M 0 5 to 2 0 1 0 01 step 008 Color Correct Coeff Y 0 5 to 2 0 1 03 0 01 step Fixed Supply Mode 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode 001 Fixed Rate Bk ENG 002 Fixed Rate C ENG 003 Fixed Rate M ENG 004 Fixed Rate Y ENG 0 to 100 5 1 step These SPs are used only when SP3 044 is set to 1 Toner Supply Rate Display ...

Page 678: ...e Bk ENG 006 Minimum Supply Time C ENG 007 Minimum Supply Time M ENG 008 Minimum Supply Time Y ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time 0 to 1000 0 1 msec step 3451 T Supply Carry Over Display DFU 001 Bk ENG 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 0 to 10000 0 1 msec step 3452 Toner Supply Carry Over Setting DFU 001 Maximum Bk ENG 002 Maximum C ENG 003 Maximum M ENG 004 Maximum Y ENG 0 to 10000 1000 1 msec...

Page 679: ...2 Potential Control FC ENG 003 Power ON BW ENG 004 Power ON FC ENG 005 MUSIC BW ENG 006 MUSIC FC ENG 007 Vsg Adj ENG 008 Charge AC Control ENG 009 MUSIC Power ON BW ENG 010 MUSIC Power ON FC ENG 0 to 2000 0 1 page step Execution Interval Setting 3511 Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode 001 Job End Potential Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 250 1 page step 002 Job End Potential Control FC ENG 0 ...

Page 680: ... 1 1 step 0 Not Correct OFF 1 Correct ON 022 Correction Coeff 1 JE BW ENG 0 to 1 0 2 0 01 page step 023 Correction Coeff 2 JE BW ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 024 Correction Coeff 1 JE FC ENG 0 to 1 0 5 0 01 step 025 Correction Coeff 2 JE FC ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 026 Correction Coeff 1 Interrupt BW ENG 0 to 1 0 1 0 01 step 027 Correction Coeff 2 Interrupt BW ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 028 Correction Coeff 1...

Page 681: ...p 003 Date ENG 1 to 31 1 1 step 004 Hour ENG 0 to 23 0 1 step 005 Minute ENG 0 to 59 0 1 step Environmental Displ Job End 3514 Displays the environmental conditions for the last job These are used for process control execution timing 001 Temperature ENG 1280 to 1270 0 0 1 C step 002 Relative Humidity ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 RH step 003 Absolute Humidity ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 g cm3 step Execution Interval Di...

Page 682: ...to increase This may cause low image density or poor transfer white dots To prevent this the coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be consumed by performing the refresh mode 001 Dev Motor Rotation Display Bk ENG 002 Dev Motor Rotation Display C ENG 003 Dev Motor Rotation Display M ENG 004 Dev Motor Rotation Display Y ENG 0 to 1000 0 0 1 m step 005 Rotation Threshold ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 1 m st...

Page 683: ...1 time step 023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area ENG 10 to 2550 280 10 cm2 step 024 Supply Coefficient ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 025 Job End Area Coefficient ENG 0 1 to 25 5 1 0 1 step 026 Job End Vb Coefficient ENG 0 to 100 30 1 step 027 Job End Length ENG 0 to 100 19 1mm step 028 Job End Supply Amt ENG 0 to 1 0 45 0 001 mg cm2 step 029 Refresh Page Thresh ENG 030 Mode Counter Bk ENG 031 Mode Count...

Page 684: ...NG 003 Toner End Recovery M ENG 004 Toner End Recovery Y ENG 005 Vsg Adjustment ENG 006 Developer Agitation ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 007 Process Control ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON once 2 ON twice 008 MUSIC ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON once 2 ON twice 009 Drum Phase Adj ENG 010 Charge AC Control ENG 011 Blade Damage Prevention ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 012 Vsg Average Error ENG 0 o...

Page 685: ...w ENG 004 Temperature L Power ON ENG 0 or 3 0 1 revolution step 005 Temp Range Thresh T2 ENG 20 or 30 30 1 deg step 006 Temp Range Thresh T2 ENG 0 or 15 15 1 deg step 010 Temp Thresh Temp Thresh High ENG 0 or 50 30 1 deg step 011 Temp Thresh Temp Thresh Low ENG 0 or 50 15 1 deg step Initial Process Control Setting 3522 Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on When the current cond...

Page 686: ... stand by is executed 001 Non use Time Setting ENG 0 to 1440 360 1 minute step 002 Temp Range ENG 0 to 99 10 1 C step 003 Relative Humidity Range ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 004 Absolute Humidity Range ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m3 step 005 Maximum Execution Number ENG Adjusts the maximum execution time for the process control at stand by 0 to 99 10 1 time step 3611 Dev Gamma Display Set 001 Bk Current ENG Di...

Page 687: ...ndard target development gamma for each color 0 to 5 0 9 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 010 C Standard Target Set ENG 011 V Standard Target Set ENG 012 Y Standard Target Set ENG 0 to 5 0 8 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 013 Environmental Correction ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development gamma 0 or 1 1 0 Not Correct 1 Correct 014 K Max Correction ENG 015 C Max Correction ENG 016 M Max Co...

Page 688: ...with the process control for each line speed and color 001 Standard Speed Bk ENG 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 009 Low Speed Bk ENG 010 Low Speed C ENG 011 Low Speed M ENG 012 Low Speed Y ENG 0 to 700 550 1 V step Charge DC Control Display Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 3631 Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each li...

Page 689: ...0 mm sec 3641 Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color 001 Standard Speed Bk ENG 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 0 to 3 1 75 0 01 kV step LD Power Control Display Standard 120 mm sec Low 60 mm sec 3651 Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment 001 Standard Speed Bk ENG 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard ...

Page 690: ...l Bk 3711 Displays the factory settings of the black PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 1 22 to 3 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 2 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1...

Page 691: ... 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 2 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 ENG 010 Serial Number 2 ENG 0 to 255 1 V step 011 Adjustment Vt ENG 012 Adjustment Vtref ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 013 Adjustment...

Page 692: ...erial Number 1 ENG 010 Serial Number 2 ENG 0 to 255 1 V step 011 Adjustment Vt ENG 012 Adjustment Vtref ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 013 Adjustment Vtcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 014 Adjustment Gamma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 015 Adjustment Vcnt Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step HST Concentration Control Y 3714 Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt E...

Page 693: ...t Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step Toner Collection Bttl Full 3800 Displays adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings These SPs are used for NRS 001 Condition CTL 0 to 4 0 1 step 002 Detection Times CTL 0 to 50 1 step 003 Print Page AF Near Full CTL 0 to 2000 0 1 sheet step 004 Pixel Count AF Near Full CTL 0 to 200000 1 cm2 step 005 Pixel Count Af Replacement CTL Displays the pixel counter ...

Page 694: ...ection bottle 013 Total Collected Toner ENG Displays the total amount of the used toner 0 to 999999999 1 1 014 Full Detected Date ENG Displays the date of the full detection for the toner collection bottle 3810 ITB T Collection Bttl Full 001 Condition CTL 0 to 4 0 1 step 002 Detection Times CTL 0 to 50 1 step 003 Print Page Af Near Full CTL 0 to 2000 0 1 sheet step 004 Pixel Count After Near Full ...

Page 695: ...cted the actuator in the toner collection bottle 013 Total Collected Toner ENG Displays the total amount of the used toner 0 to 999999999 1 1 014 Full Detected Date ENG Displays the date of the full detection fot the toner collection bottle New PCU Detection 3901 Turns new PCU detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Manual New Unit Set 3902 Turns the new unit detection flag ...

Page 696: ...G 016 Fusing Belt ENG 017 ITB Cleaning Unit ENG 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON Do not use 3902 013 if you only change the cleaning unit 3902 015 This is for the image transfer belt cleaning unit 018 PTR Unit ENG 019 PCU Toner Collection Bottle ENG 020 ITB Toner Collection Bottle ENG 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON SP4 XXX Scanner Sub Scan Mag Adjustment 4008 Adjusts the sub scan magnification by changing the scanner mot...

Page 697: ...direction 001 ENG 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm step FA Scanner Erase Margin Scale Scanner Erase Margin Scale 4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap between the original and the scale 001 Book Leading Edge 002 Book Trailing Edge 003 Book Left 004 Book Right ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA 005 ADF Leading Edge 007 ADF Left 008 ADF Right ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm s...

Page 698: ...ction ON OFF ENG Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on off 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Dust Detect Level ENG Selects the detect level 0 to 8 4 1 step 0 lowest detection level 8 highest detection level 003 Correction Level ENG Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF 0 to 4 0 1 step 0 Off 1 Weakest 2 Weak 3 Strong 4 Strongest APS Operation Check 4301 Displays a code...

Page 699: ...G 0 to 3 0 1 step 0 Normal Detection the machine detects A4 LT size as A4 or LT depending on the paper size setting 1 A4 Sideways LT Lengthwise 2 LT Sideways A4 Lengthwise 3 8K 16K 001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K 16K size 4308 Scan Size Detection 001 Detection ON OFF ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 4309 Scan Size Deted Setting 001 Original Density Thresh ENG 0...

Page 700: ... 1 digit step Scanner Erase Margin ENG 4400 Set the Mask for Original These SPs set the area to be masked during platen book mode scanning 001 Book Leading Edge 002 Book Trailing Edge 003 Book Left 004 Book Right 005 ADF Leading Edge 007 ADF Left 008 ADF Right 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step IPU Test Pattern 4417 Selects the IPU test pattern 001 Test Pattern Selection 0 to 24 0 1 step 0 Scanned image 13 Gr...

Page 701: ...patch 64 15 Gray pattern 1 16 Gray pattern 2 17 Gray Pattern 3 18 Shading pattern 19 Thin line pattern 20 Scanned Grid pattern 21 Scanned Gray scale 22 Scanned Color patch 23 Scanned Slant Grid C 24 Scanned Slant Grid D 4429 Illegal Copy Output 001 Copy 002 Scanner 003 Fax ENG 0 to 3 3 1 step Saturation Adjustment 4440 Adjusts the level of saturation for copying 001 ENG 0 to 5 3 1 step 0 High 1 Lo...

Page 702: ...anning method platen ADF 001 Lower Limit ENG 0 to 1023 364 4 digit step 002 Background Level ENG 512 to 1532 932 1 digit step ACC Target Density 4501 Selects the ACC result 001 Copy Bk Text ENG 002 Copy C Text ENG 003 Copy M Text ENG 004 Copy Y Text ENG 005 Copy Bk Photo ENG 006 Copy C Photo ENG 007 Copy M Photo ENG 008 Copy Y Photo ENG 0 to 10 5 1 step 10 Darkest density ACC Correction Bright 450...

Page 703: ...pattern 001 Master K ENG 002 Master C ENG 003 Master M ENG 004 Master Y ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 005 Slave K ENG 006 Slave C ENG 007 Slave M ENG 008 Slave Y ENG Reserved Printer Vector Correction 4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues RY YR YG etc x 4 Colors R G B Option for a total of 48 parameters 001 004 RY Phase Option R G B 005 008 YR Phase Option R G B 009 012 YG Phase Option R...

Page 704: ...50 Scanner Appl Text Chart DFU 4551 Scanner Appl Text DFU 4552 Scanner Appl Txt Dropout DFU 4553 Scanner Appl Text Photo DFU 4554 Scanner Appl Photo DFU 4565 Scanner Appl GrayScale DFU 4570 Scan Appl Color Text Photo DFU 4571 Scan Appl Color Glossy Photo DFU 4572 Scan Appl AutoColor DFU MTF 0 Off 1 15 Strong ENG 0 to 15 8 1 step 0 MTF Off 005 Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designe...

Page 705: ...581 FAX Appl Text Chart DFU 4582 FAX Appl Text Photo DFU 4583 FAX Appl Photo DFU MTF 0 Off 1 15 Strong ENG 0 to 15 8 1 step 0 MTF Off 005 Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 Strong ENG 0 to 7 4 1 step 006 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Bright...

Page 706: ...05 Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 Strong ENG 0 to 7 4 1 step 006 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 007 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter Contrast 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 008 Set highe...

Page 707: ...e check for the SBU registers 002 Address Set 003 Data Set Not used 4603 AGC Execution 001 HP Detection Enable 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the AGC 002 HP Detection Disable 0 or 1 0 1 step DFU 4604 FGATE Open Close DFU 001 Opens or closes the FGATE signal This SP automatically returns to the default status close after exiting this SP 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 4609 Gray Balance Set R 001 Book Scan 512...

Page 708: ... board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Latest RO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4624 Black Level Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Latest GE Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circui...

Page 709: ... circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step Analog Gain Adjust 4628 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 001 Latest R Color 0 to 7 0 1 digit step Analog Gain Adjust 4629 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 001 Latest G Color 0 to 7 0 1 digit step Analog Gain Adjust 4630 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on t...

Page 710: ... 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step Scan Adjust Error 4645 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller 001 Black Offset Corr 1 002 Black Offset Corr 2 0 to 65535 0 1 digit step Read Hard Error 4647 Displays the result of the SBU connection check 001 Power ON 0 to 65535 0 1 step 0 OK Other SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails SC144 occurs 4654 Black Level Adj Display...

Page 711: ... in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Last Correct Value GO Color ENG Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4656 Black Level Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value BE Color ENG Displays the black offset value rough adj...

Page 712: ...us gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue 001 Last Correct Value BE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4661 Digital Gain Adjust RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value RE Color ENG 002 Last Correct Value RO Color ENG 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 4662 Digital Gain Adjust GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value GE Color ENG 002 Last Correct Value...

Page 713: ...p 4674 Black Level Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Factory Setting GE Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Factory Setting GO Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustmen...

Page 714: ... Setting RE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step Analog Gain Adjust 4678 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green 001 Factory Setting GE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step Analog Gain Adjust 4679 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue 001 Factory Setting BE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step Digital Gain Adjust 4680 Displays the gain value of the ampli...

Page 715: ...nsity Adjustment 4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different 001 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step White Level Peak Read 4690 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 RE 002 RO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step White Level Peak Read 4691 Displays the peak level of the white lev...

Page 716: ...he peak level of the black level scanning 001 GE 002 GO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step Black Level Peak Read 4695 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning 001 BE 002 BO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 4802 DF Shading FreeRun 001 Lamp ON 002 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or off Press OFF to stop this free run Otherwise the free run lasts 4804 Home Po...

Page 717: ...y Setting Input 002 Execution Flag 0 or 1 0 1 step ACC Data Display 4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data 0 to 255 0 1 step 001 R DATA1 ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 8 bit 002 G DATA1 ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 8 bit 003 B DATA1 ENG Photo Y Patch Level 1 8 bit 004 R DATA2 ENG Photo C Patch Level 17 8 bit 005 G DATA...

Page 718: ...th from ORION to TAURUS Bit3 Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS Bit4 to 11 Not used Bit12 Image path from LUPUS to Ri20 Bit13 Image path from Ri20 to GAVD Bit14 and 15 Not used 0 OK 1 Error 002 Performs an image path check on the BCU board and displays the result Dither Selection DFU 4905 Changes the parameters for error diffusion 001 Dither Selection ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step DFU 4909 Man Gamma Photo Mo...

Page 719: ... Idmax ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 4914 Man Gamma Text Mono Bk DFU 4915 Man Gamma Photo Bk 4916 Man Gamma Photo C 4917 Man Gamma Photo M 4918 Man Gamma Photo Y 001 Offset Highlight ENG 002 Offset Middle ENG 003 Offset Shadow ENG 004 Offset Idmax ENG 0 to 30 15 1 step 005 Option Highlight ENG 006 Option Middle ENG 007 Option Shadow ENG 008 Option Idmax ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 4948 ACC History Latest 001 YY...

Page 720: ...step 001 0 Scanner input RGB images 1 Scanner I F RGB images 2 RGB images done by Shading correction Shading ON Black offset ON 3 Shading data 4 Inner pattern data Gray scale 5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction 6 RGB images done by Digital AE 7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction 8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction 9 RGB image done by Filtering correction 10 RGB images d...

Page 721: ... definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF 001 High Compression PDFvity Level text photo ENG 0 to 2 1 1 step 0 Text priority 1 Normal 2 Photo priority SP5 XXX Mode mm inch Display Selection 5024 Display units mm or inch for custom paper sizes 001 0 mm 1 inch CTL 0 mm Europe Asia 1 inch USA Accounting Counter 5045 Selects the counting method NOTE The counting method can be ch...

Page 722: ... 1 Toner Refill Detection Display CTL 0 or 1 0 Alphanumeric 0 ON 1 OFF Display IP Address 5055 Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON Coverage Counter Display 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Not display 1 Display Toner Remaining Icon Display 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display ic...

Page 723: ...using Unit CTL 010 Fusing Roller CTL 011 Fusing Belt CTL 012 PCU Toner Collection Bottle CTL 5066 Parts PM Menu Display Setting Display or does not display the PM parts button on the LCD 001 CTL 0 or 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 5067 Parts PM System Setting Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts If the user service is selected PM alert is displayed on the LCD 001 PCU ...

Page 724: ... supervisor 5104 1 Double Count CTL 0 to 2 0 1 1step 0 NO Normal Count 1 Yes Double Count 2 Yes except for By Pass Normal count for unknown sie 5113 Option Counter Type 001 Default Optional Counter Type CTL This program specifies the counter type Model D038 D041 0 None 1 Key card RK 3 4 2 Key card down 3 Prepaid card 4 Coin rack 5 MF key card 8 Key counter Vendor 9 Bar code Printer Model D037 0 No...

Page 725: ...he information on the optional counter When you install or remove an optional counter check the settings 5121 Counter Up Timing CTL 0 Feed 1 Exit 001 This program specifies when the counter goes up The settings refer to paper feed and paper exit respectively 5126 F Size Original Setting ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 8 1 2 x 13 Foolscap 1 8 1 4 x 13 Folio 2 8 x 13 F 001 Selects F size original setting 5127...

Page 726: ... 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set 001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program Fax Printing Mode at Optional 5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device 001 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Automatic printing 1 No automatic printin...

Page 727: ...0 EU ASIA 1 NA 1 step 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 002 TRAY 1 2 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 A3 1 DLT 003 TRAY 1 3 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B4 1 LG 004 TRAY 1 4 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 005 TRAY 2 1 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 006 TRAY 2 2 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 A3 1 DLT 007 TRAY 2 3 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B4 1 LG 008 TRAY 2 4 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B5 LEF...

Page 728: ... 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B4 1 LG 016 TRAY 4 4 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF RK 4 Disconnect Operation 5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 accounting device disconnection If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to 1 Enable the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops 001 ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable Copy NV Version 5188 Display...

Page 729: ...Left Position 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Set Time 5302 Adjusts the RTC real time clock time setting for the local time zone Examples For Japan 9 GMT enter 540 9 hours x 60 min DOM 540 Tokyo NA 300 New York EU 60 Paris CH 480 Peking TW 480 Taipei AS 480 Hong Kong 002 Time Difference CTL 1440 to 1440 Area 1 min step 5307 Summer Time Setting 0 to 1 NA EU ASIA 1 step 0 ...

Page 730: ... to 5 10 minutes step For example 3500010 EU default The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0 00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 Rule Set End 004 Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 0 to 5 4th digit The day of the week...

Page 731: ...ver 162 Extend Certification Detail 200 SDK1 Unique ID CTL 201 SDK1 Certification Method CTL 210 SDK2 Unique ID CTL 211 SDK2 Certification Method CTL 220 SDK3 Unique ID CTL 221 SDK3 Certification Method CTL 230 SDK certification device CTL SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstalled DFU 240 Detail Option CTL 5404 User Code Counter Clear...

Page 732: ...o 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Lockout Threshold CTL Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts 1 to 10 5 1 003 Cancellation On Off CTL Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off no wait time lockout not cancelled 1 On system waits cancels lockout if correct user ID and passw...

Page 733: ...ng continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords 0 to 60 15 1 min 5415 Password Attack 001 Permissible Number CTL Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to the system 0 to 100 30 1 attempt 002 Detect Time CTL Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected 1 to 10 5 1 sec 5416 Access Information 001...

Page 734: ...o 500 100 1 002 Attack Detect Time CTL Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features 10 to 30 10 1 sec 003 Productivity Fall Wait CTL Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 0 to 9 3 1 sec 004 Attack Max Number CTL Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in o...

Page 735: ...le 0 011 Document Server CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server 0 to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 021 Fax CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application 0 to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 031 Scanner CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications 0 to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 041 Printer CT...

Page 736: ... On 002 Panel Disp CTL Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs 0 to 1 1 1 1 On 0 Off 5490 MF Key Card Japan only 001 CTL Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard 0 to 1 0 1 0 Disabled Cancels operation without a user code 1 Enabled Allows operation without a user code 002 Count Mode Setting CTL 5501 PM Alarm 001 PM Alarm Lev...

Page 737: ... counter decreases by 1 when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets for example default 1500 sheets The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches 5 001 CTL 0 to 255 20 100 copies step 5507 Supply Alarm CTL 001 Paper Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On DFU 002 Staple Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On Japan only 003 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On DFU 080 Toner Call Timing Changes the t...

Page 738: ...able 003 Enables disables initiating a call when the front door remains open Jam Detection Time Length 3 to 30 10 1 minute step 011 Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 Jam Detection Continuous Count 2 to 10 5 1 step 012 Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is...

Page 739: ...ner Alarm 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call 011 Supply Manegement Report Call 012 Jam Door Open Call 5610 Base Gamma Cutl P Command 004 Recall Factory Setting 005 Restore Factory Setting 006 Restore Prev Setting 5611 Toner Color in 2C B C ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 001 Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two color mode B M ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest d...

Page 740: ...ta correction value of the red signal in two color mode R Y ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 006 Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the red signal in two color mode 5618 Color Mode Display Selection CTL 0 or 1 1 0 ACS Color Black White Two Color Single color 1 ACD Full Color Black White 001 Selects the color selection display on the LCD Memory Clear SP5 801 The following tables list...

Page 741: ...tializes default system settings SCS System Control Service settings operation display coordinates and ROM update information 004 IMH Memory Clr 005 MCS 006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings 007 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer 008 Printer application The following service setti...

Page 742: ...r Admin job history and local storage file numbers 014 Clear DCS Settings Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings 015 Clear UCS Settings Initializes the UCS User Information Control Service settings 016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report Service settings 017 CCS Initializes the CCS Certification and Charge control Service settings 018 SRM Memory Clr Initiali...

Page 743: ... 004 BCU Inputs the serial number for the BCU 005 FRAM Displays the serial number for the BCU 5812 Service Tel No Setting Service CTL 001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List which can be printed with the user s Counter menu This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input Facsimile CTL 002 Sets the fax...

Page 744: ...ting 0 to 2 2 1 step 0 Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 Remote service on CE Call 002 Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Start of the service 1 End of the service NOTE This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 Function Flag 003 Enables or disables the remote service function 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 004 Comunication Test C...

Page 745: ...cond step RCG Read Timeout 010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step Port 80 Enable 011 Enables disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method 0 or 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 012 Remote Communication Permission Setting 013 RFU Timing RCG C Registed 021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag 0 Installation not completed 1 Installation completed R...

Page 746: ...is SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address The address is necessary to set up Cumin N The address display is limited to 128 characters Characters beyond the 128 character are ignored This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report Proxy Port Number 064 This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin N and the gateway...

Page 747: ...e certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update 3 The certification update failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update 4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL 11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the res...

Page 748: ...ation update CERT Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification 0 Normal There is no request for certification update in progress 1 Request for certification update in progress The current certification has expired 2 An SSL error notification has been issued Issued after the certification has expired 3 Notification of shift from a common aut...

Page 749: ...088 CERT PAC Version Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification 089 CERT ID2 Code Displays ID2 for the NRS certification Spaces are displayed as underscores _ Asteriskes indicate that no NRS certification exists 090 CERT Subject Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject CN the following 17 bytes Spaces are displayed as underscores _ Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists 091...

Page 750: ...e Type Authentication Judgment 151 Touch Execute Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin M is connected as either dial up or push type so Cumin M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line The current progress success or failure of this execution can be displayed with SP5816 152 If the execution succeeded SP5816 153 will display the result for conf...

Page 751: ...hone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone Inside Japan 2 may also be displayed 0 Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS 2 Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS Outside Line Outgoing Number 154 The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for Cumin M in a system that employs a PBX internal line If the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and Cumin M has connected to the external line this ...

Page 752: ...ed to and used by the Call Center to return calls Limit 24 numbers numbers only Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming 162 When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin M modem it sends a repeating ID tone 1 This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the number of the Cumin M modem is dialed up and connected 0 to 24 1 1 step The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec For exa...

Page 753: ...for the notification that the certification has been completed However Cumin M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time do this SP to cancel the time restriction 186 RCG CM DebugbitSW FAX TX Priority 187 This SP determines whether pushing the off ...

Page 754: ...umber that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203 0 Succeeded 1 Inquiry number error 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 9 Inquiry executing Confirm Place 205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device fro...

Page 755: ...at execution error Illegal Modem Parameter 11003 Unexpected error 12002 Inquiry registration attempted without acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration Operation Error Incorrect Setting 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2 2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the correct international pref...

Page 756: ...the RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center NV RAM Data Upload Refer to IMPORTANT NOTE in Sect 5 8 5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data except for counters and the serial number from the NVRAM to an SD card For details see the NVRAM Data Upload Download in the System Maintenance Reference of the Field Service Manual 001 NV RAM Data Upload NV RAM D...

Page 757: ...023 Active IPv4 Gateway Address Not Used 050 1284 Compatibility Centro Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 052 ECP Centro Enables or disables ECP Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This SP is activated only when SP5 828 50 is set to 1 065 Job Spooling Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 066 Job Spooling Clear St...

Page 758: ...1 Enable 145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Link Local Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 147 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1 149 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 2 151 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 3 153 Active IPv6 Stateless Add...

Page 759: ...onsists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 236 Web Item visible Displays or does not display the Web system items 0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff 0 x ffff 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed bit0 Net RICOH bit1 Consumable Supplier bit2 15 Reserved all 237 Web shoppin...

Page 760: ...acters 241 Web visible Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system 0 to 1 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 242 Web Link2 Name Same as 239 243 Web Link2 URL Same as 240 244 Web Link2 visible Same as 241 5832 HDD HDD Initialization CTL 001 HDD Formatting ALL 002 HDD Formatting IMH 003 HDD Formatting Thumbnail 004 HDD Formatting Job Log 005 HDD Formatting Printer Fonts ...

Page 761: ...e document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 071 Reduction for Copy Color 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 072 Reduction for Copy B W Text 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 073 Reduction for Copy B W Other 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 074 Reduction for Printer Color 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 075 Reduction for Printer B W 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 076 Reductio...

Page 762: ...default for documents sent to the document management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 101 Primary srv IP address Sets the IP address for the primary capture server This is basically adjusted by the remote system 102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system 103 Primary srv port number This is ...

Page 763: ...3 1 step 122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi Reso Print Color This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 to 3 2 1 step 123 Selects the resolution for color print mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 300dpi 2 150dpi 3 75dpi Reso Print Color This is basicall...

Page 764: ... number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting 008 Transmission Speed CTL 0 x 00 to 0 x FF 0 x FF to Auto 0 x FF to Auto Default 0 x 11 55M Fix ...

Page 765: ...ayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 044 11g Slot Time CTL Selects the slot time for IEEE802 11 0 to 1 0 1 0 20 µm 1 9 µm 045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 5841 Supply Name Setting 001 Toner Name Setting Black 002 Toner Name Setting Cyan 003 ...

Page 766: ...desetting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Minute Second Msec 0 to 6 Not used 5844 USB Transfer Rate CTL 0x01 Full speed 0x04 Auto Change 001 Adjusts the USB transfer rate 002 Vendor ID CTL Displays the vendor ID DFU 003 Product ID CTL Displays the product ID DFU 004 Device Release Number CTL Displays the development release version number DFU 100 Notify Unsupport CTL Delive...

Page 767: ... Address Secondary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting Delivery Server Model 0 to 4 0 1 step 009 Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I O device 0 Unknow...

Page 768: ...H authorization link Bit5 to 0 Not used Server Scheme Primary DFU 013 This is used for the scan router program Server Port Number Primary DFU 014 This is used for the scan router program Server URL Path Primary DFU 015 This is used for the scan router program Server Scheme Secondary DFU 016 This is used for the scan router program Server Port Number Secondary DFU 017 This is used for the scan rout...

Page 769: ... machine off and on Maximum Entries 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step 003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed Delivery Server Retry Timer 0 to 255 0 1 step 006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the deli...

Page 770: ... access to all users Procedure 1 Turn the machine off 2 Install the new HDD 3 Turn the machine on 4 The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically 5 However at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator 6 Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041 After this SP executes successfully any user can access the address book 043 Addr...

Page 771: ...ta from the SD card in the service slot Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine This feature does not work if the card is write protected After you do this SP go out of the SP mode and then turn the power off Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing Search Option 060 This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book ...

Page 772: ...sed in the identification mode 0 to 65535 3671 1 step 094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data Rep Resolution Reduction CTL 5847 5847 1 through 5847 8 changes the default settings of image data transferred externally by the Net File page reference function 0 to 5 2 1 step 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetF...

Page 773: ...5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 002 Access Ctrl Repository only Lower 4 bits 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder 0010 No writing control 003 Access Control Doc Svr Print Lower 4 bits 004 Access Control User Directory only Lower 4 bits 007 Access Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4 bits 009 Access Ctrl Job Ctrl Lower 4 bi...

Page 774: ...rimary Srv 214 Setting Secondary Srv 215 Setting Start Time 216 Setting Interval Time 217 Setting Timing NIA 5849 Installation Date CTL 5849 1 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst Date 5849 2 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 0 or 1 1 0 OFF No Print 1 ON Print 003 Total Counter Bluetooth ...

Page 775: ...n updating the remote ROM 002 Local Port CTL 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 5857 Save Debug Log CTL On Off 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 001 Switches the debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on Target 2 HDD 3 SD 2 HDD 3 SD Card 002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5 858 are satisfied 2 to 3 ...

Page 776: ... Debug Debug Save When CTL 5858 These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002 SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes 001 Engine SC Error Turns on off the debug save for SC codes generated by copier engine errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Controller SC Error Turns on off the de...

Page 777: ...60 SMTP POP3 IMAP4 CTL 020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout 1 to 168 72 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time 021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance 0 to 1 1 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 No 1 Yes 022 SMT...

Page 778: ... authorization is enabled by UP mode 026 S MIME MIME Header Setting Selects the MIME header type of an E mail sent by S MIME 0 to 2 0 1 0 Microsoft Outlook Express standard 1 Internet Draft standard 2 RFC standard 5866 E mail Alert Not Used 001 Report Validity CTL 005 Add Date Field CTL Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail 0 or 1 0 0 Not added 1 Added 5870 Common Key...

Page 779: ...to be copied Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5873 1 5875 SC Auto Reboot 001 Reboot Setting CTL Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs 0 or 1 0 0 The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does...

Page 780: ...Installs the HDD Encryption unit 5881 Fixed Phrase Block erasing 001 ENG 5882 CPM Set DFU 001 ENG 5884 Plain 1 2 Setting 001 By pass Table ENG 002 Tray 1 ENG 003 Tray 2 ENG 004 Tray 3 ENG 005 Tray 4 ENG 0 or 1 0 0 Plain Paper 1 1 Plain Paper 2 WIM Settings Web Image Monitor Settings 5885 Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor 020 Document Server ACC Ctrl CTL 0 OFF 1 ON Bit Meaning 0 ...

Page 781: ...ox list 5 to 20 10 1 100 Set Signature 101 Set Encryption Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted when they are transmitted by an e mail 0 to 1 0 1 0 Not encrypted 1 Encryption 200 Detect Mem Leak 201 DocSur Timeout SD Get Counter 5887 This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated 001 CTL This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot ...

Page 782: ...attern which allows separate counter for print FAX reception B W copy and Full color copy Pattern 1 SP5 894 001 1 Separate counter for B W and color is available under this pattern However it is not possible to distinguish between Copier and Printer outputs Pattern 2 SP5 894 001 2 With this setting it is possible to distinguish between B W and color outputs for both the Copier and Printer However ...

Page 783: ...u must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting 5974 Cherry Server Specifies which version of ScanRouter Lite or Full is installed 001 Cherry Server CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Lite 1 Full 5985 Device Setting The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller bo...

Page 784: ...tion 001 0 OFF 1 ON This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 occurs 5990 SP print mode Prints out the SMC sheets 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program SP6 XXX Peripherals 6006 ADF Adjustm...

Page 785: ...erase margin at the original trailing edge 007 Trailing Edge Erase ENG 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step ADF Input Check 6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF Only Bit 0 is used for ADF input check Iutput Check Table in this section ADF Output Check 6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check It is not possible to activate more than one component at ...

Page 786: ...F Folio SEF 11 x 15 LG SEF Foolscap SEF LT SEF US EXE 8 x 10 NA LT LEF US EXE LEF DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm 001 Original Size Detection Priority EU ASIA LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm DF Magnification Adj DF Magnification Adjustment 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for the ARDF 001 DF Magnification Adj CTL 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 step Staple Position Adjustment 6101...

Page 787: ...stment 6104 Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction 001 Side to Side Adjustment ENG 2 0 to 2 0 0 0 2mm step Finisher Input Check Finisher D429 6120 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher Iutput Check Table in this section Finisher Output Check Finisher D429 6121 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher Output Check Ta...

Page 788: ...test 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 CTL Total Paper Jam Counter 7502 Displays the total number of jams detected 001 Total Jam CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step Total Original Jam Counter 7503 Displays the total number of original jams 001 Original Jam counter CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 original step 7504 Paper Jam Location ON ...

Page 789: ... Bypass ON CTL 009 Duplex ON CTL 011 Vertical Transport 1 ON CTL 012 Vertical Transport 2 ON CTL 017 Registration ON CTL 018 Fusing Entrance ON CTL 019 Fusing Exit ON CTL 020 Paper Exit ON CTL 021 Relay Exit ON CTL 022 Relay Transport ON CTL 025 Duplex Exit ON CTL 026 Duplex Reverse ON CTL 027 Duplex Entrance ON CTL For details the Jam Detection in the Appendix Jam Detection 028 1 Bin Exit Sensor ...

Page 790: ... Exit CTL 242 Finisher Staple CTL 243 Finisher Exit CTL 244 Finisher Drive Motor CTL 245 Finisher Tray Lift Motor CTL 246 Finisher Jogger Motor CTL 247 Finisher Shift Motor CTL 248 Finisher Staple Motor CTL 249 Finisher Exit Motor CTL 250 Finisher Entrance CTL 251 Finisher Proof Exit CTL For details the Jam Detection in the Appendix Jam Detection Original Jam Detection 7505 Displays the total numb...

Page 791: ...rection OFF 054 Registration OFF 055 Paper Exit OFF Jam Count by Paper Size 7506 Displays the number of jams according to the paper size 005 A4 LEF 006 A5 LEF 014 B5 LEF 038 LT LEF 044 HLT LEF 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF 160 DLT SEF 164 LG SEF 166 LT SEF 172 HLT SEF 255 Others CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step ...

Page 792: ...ms 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 CTL Original Jam History 7508 Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 CTL ...

Page 793: ...8 Dev Unit Y CTL 009 Fusing Unit CTL 010 Fusing Roller CTL 011 Fusing Belt CTL 012 PCU Toner Collection Bottle CTL 0 or 1 1 7801 ROM No Firmware Version 255 Engine CTL 7803 PM Counter Display Page Unit Color Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit PM counters click up based on the number of A4 LT LEF size sheets printed Therefore the A3 DLT Double Count is activated...

Page 794: ...h the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 1 to 10 NOTE The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station 001 Paper 002 Page PCU Bk 003 Page PCU C 004 Page PCU M 005 Page PCU Y 006 Page Development Unit Bk 007 Page Development Unit C 008 Page Development Unit M 009 Page Development Unit Y 010 Page Developer Bk 011 Page Developer C 012 Page Developer M 013 Page Developer Y 014 Page ITB Unit 015 ...

Page 795: ...utomatically moved to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 11 to 20 and is reset to 0 The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 11 to 20 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034 Rotation PCU Y 035 Rotation Development Unit Bk 036 Rotation Development Unit C 037 Rotation Development Unit M 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 039 Rotatio...

Page 796: ...s the end condition for that unit If the print count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the R counter is still less than 100 049 Amount ITB T Collect Bottle 050 Amount PCU T Collect Bottle 0 to 999999999 1 mm step 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y 065 Rotation Development Unit Bk 066 Rotation Development Unit C...

Page 797: ...n printouts not revolutions If the number of printouts reaches the limit the machine enters the end condition for that unit If the revolution count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the Page counter is still less than 100 079 Amt ITB T Collect Bottle 080 Amt PCU T Collect Bottle 0 to 255 1 step 091 Page PCU Bk 092 Page PCU C 093 Page PCU M 094 Page PCU...

Page 798: ...ge PTR Unit 7804 PM Counter Reset PM Counter Clear Unit Color Clears the PM counter Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute which will store the PM counter value in SP7 906 PM Counter Previous and reset the value of the current PM counter SP7 803 to 0 001 Paper 002 PCU Bk 003 PCU C 004 PCU M 005 PCU Y 006 PCU All 007 Development Unit Bk 008 Development Unit C 009 Development Unit M 010 ...

Page 799: ...Developer Y 016 Developer All 017 ITB Unit 018 ITB Cleaning Unit 019 Fusing Unit 020 Fusing Roller 021 Fusing Belt 022 PTR Unit 023 ITB T Collect Bottle 024 PCU T Collect Bottle 100 All SC Jam Counter Reset 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams 001 SC Jam Clear CTL 7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only 001 Error Total CTL 002 Error Staple CTL ...

Page 800: ... memory capacity of the controller system CTL DF Glass Dust Check 7852 Counts the number of occurrences 0 to 65 535 when dust was detected on the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter Counting is done only if SP4 020 1 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check is switched on 001 Dust Detection Counter CTL 002 Dust Detection Clear Counter CTL 0 to 65535 1 step Replacement Counter 7853 Disp...

Page 801: ...TL 012 Developer Y CTL 013 ITB Unit CTL 014 ITB Cleaning Unit CTL 015 Fusing Unit CTL 016 Fusing Roller CTL 017 Fusing Belt CTL 018 PTR Unit CTL 019 ITB T Collect Bottle CTL 020 PCU T Collect Bottle CTL 0 to 255 1 step Coverage Range 7855 Sets the color coverage threshold Coverage rate Coverage per page A4 full coverage dots x 100 There are three coverage counters Color 1 Color 2 and Color 3 A 5 d...

Page 802: ...01 Coverage Range 1 CTL 1 to 200 5 1 002 Coverage Range 2 CTL 1 to 200 20 1 Assert Info 7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis DFU 001 File Name 002 Number of Lines 003 Location CTL Prev Unit PM Counter Page or Rotations Unit Color Dev Development Unit ENG 7906 Displays the number of sheets printed with the previ...

Page 803: ... Developer M 012 Page Developer Y 013 Page ITB Unit 014 Page ITB Cleaning Unit 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 019 Page ITB T Collect Bottle 020 Page PCU T Collect Bottle Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units 0 to 9999999 0 1 mm step 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034...

Page 804: ...ation ITB Unit 044 Rotation ITB Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation Fusing Unit 046 Rotation Fusing Roller 047 Rotation Fusing Belt 048 Rotation PTR Unit 049 Rotation ITB T Collect Bottle 050 Rotation PCU T Collect Bottle Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units 0 to 255 0 1 step 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y ...

Page 805: ...it 075 Rotation Fusing Unit 076 Rotation Fusing Roller 077 Rotation Fusing Belt 078 Rotation PTU Unit 079 Rotation ITB T Collect Bottle 080 Rotation PCU T Collect Bottle Displays the value given by the following formula Current count Yield count x 100 where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part and Yield count is the recommended yield 0 to 255 0 1 step 091 Page PCU Bk 092...

Page 806: ...per Y 103 Page ITB Unit 104 Page ITB Cleaning Unit 105 Page Fusing Unit 106 Page Fusing Roller 107 Page Fusing Belt 108 Page PTR Unit Toner Bottle Bk 7931 Displays the toner bottle information for Bk 001 Machine Serial ID ENG 002 Cartridge Ver EGN 003 Brand ID EGN 004 Area ID EGN 005 Product ID EGN 006 Color ID EGN 007 Maintenance ID EGN 008 New Product Information EGN 009 Recycle Counter EGN ...

Page 807: ...chment Total Counter EGN 017 Attachment Color Counter EGN 018 End Total Counter EGN 019 End Color Counter EGN 020 Attachment Date EGN 021 End Date EGN Toner Bottle M 7932 Displays the toner bottle information for M 001 Machine Serial ID ENG 002 Cartridge Ver EGN 003 Brand ID EGN 004 Area ID EGN 005 Product ID EGN 006 Color ID EGN 007 Maintenance ID EGN 008 New Product Information EGN 009 Recycle C...

Page 808: ...al Counter EGN 017 Attachment Color Counter EGN 018 End Total Counter EGN 019 End Color Counter EGN 020 Attachment Date EGN 021 End Date Toner Bottle C 7933 Displays the toner bottle information for C 001 Machine Serial ID ENG 002 Cartridge Ver EGN 003 Brand ID EGN 004 Area ID EGN 005 Product ID EGN 006 Color ID EGN 007 Maintenance ID EGN 008 New Product Information EGN 009 Recycle Counter EGN ...

Page 809: ...chment Total Counter EGN 017 Attachment Color Counter EGN 018 End Total Counter EGN 019 End Color Counter EGN 020 Attachment Date EGN 021 End Date EGN Toner Bottle Y 7934 Displays the toner bottle information for Y 001 Machine Serial ID ENG 002 Cartridge Ver EGN 003 Brand ID EGN 004 Area ID EGN 005 Product ID EGN 006 Color ID EGN 007 Maintenance ID EGN 008 New Product Information EGN 009 Recycle C...

Page 810: ...19 End Color Counter EGN 020 Attachment Date EGN 021 End Date EGN 7935 Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 Bk 001 Serial No 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Bk 005 Serial No 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Bk 009 Serial No 010...

Page 811: ...ter 020 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Bk 7936 Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 M 001 Serial No 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for M 005 Serial No 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for M 009 ...

Page 812: ...937 Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 C 001 Serial No 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for C 005 Serial No 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for C 009 Serial No 010 Attachment Date 011 Attachment Total Counter 012 Refill Information E...

Page 813: ...ent Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Y 005 Serial No 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Y 009 Serial No 010 Attachment Date 011 Attachment Total Counter 012 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for Y 013 S...

Page 814: ...ement Date 7950 Displays the replacement date of each PM unit 001 ITB Unit ENG 002 ITB Cleaning Unit EGN 003 PTR Unit EGN 004 Fusing Unit EGN 005 Fusing Roller EGN 006 Fusing Belt EGN 013 PCU Bk EGN 014 PCU C EGN 015 PCU M EGN 016 PCU Y EGN 017 Development Unit Bk EGN 018 Development Unit C EGN 019 Development Unit M EGN 020 Development Unit Y EGN 021 Developer Bk EGN 022 Developer C EGN 023 Devel...

Page 815: ... 001 Page PCU Bk 002 Page PCU C 003 Page PCU M 004 Page PCU Y 005 Page Development Unit Bk 006 Page Development Unit C 007 Page Development Unit M 008 Page Development Unit Y 009 Page Developer Bk 010 Page Developer C 011 Page Developer M 012 Page Developer Y 013 Page ITB Unit 014 Page ITB Cleaning Unit 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 031 Rotation...

Page 816: ...039 Rotation Developer Bk 040 Rotation Developer C 041 Rotation Developer M 042 Rotation Developer Y 043 Rotation ITB Unit 044 Rotation ITB Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation Fusing Unit 046 Rotation Fusing Roller 047 Rotation Fusing Belt 048 Rotation PTR Unit 049 Rotation ITB T Collect Bottle 050 Rotation PCU T Collect Bottle PM Yield Setting 7952 Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit 001 Rotation ITB U...

Page 817: ... 300000 1000 mg step 011 Page ITB Unit EGN 0 to 999999 240000 1000 sheet step 012 Page ITB Cleaning Unit EGN 0 to 999999 180000 1 sheet step 013 Page Fusing Unit EGN 014 Page Fusing Roller EGN 015 Page Fusing Belt EGN 0 to 999999 144000 1 sheet step 016 Page PTR Unit EGN 0 to 999999 240000 1 sheet step 021 Day Threshold PCU Bk EGN 022 Day Threshold PCU C EGN 023 Day Threshold PCU M EGN 024 Day Thr...

Page 818: ...1 Day Threshold Developer M EGN 032 Day Threshold Developer Y EGN 033 Day Threshold ITB Unit EGN 034 Day Threshold ITB Cleaning Unit EGN 035 Day Threshold Fusing Unit EGN 036 Day Threshold Fusing Roller EGN 037 Day Threshold Fusing Belt EGN 038 Rotation PCU Bk 039 Rotation PCU C EGN 040 Rotation PCU M 041 Rotation PCU Y 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm step 042 Rotation Development Unit Bk EGN 0 to 999999999...

Page 819: ...er C 048 Rotation Developer M 049 Rotation Developer Y EGN 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm step 050 Page PCU Bk 051 Page PCU C 052 Page PCU M 053 Page PCU Y EGN 0 to 999999 0 1 sheet step 054 Page Development Unit Bk 055 Page Development Unit C 056 Page Development Unit M 057 Page Development Unit Y EGN 0 to 999999 0 1 sheet step 058 Page Developer Bk 059 Page Developer C 060 Page Developer M 061 Page Devel...

Page 820: ... used for NRS alarms 7953 Operation Env Log PCU Bk Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment T Temperature C H Relative Humidity 001 T 0 002 0 T 5 0 H 30 003 0 T 5 30 H 70 004 T 5 70 H 100 005 5 T 15 0 H 30 006 5 T 15 30 H 55 007 5 T 15 55 H 80 008 5 T 15 80 H 100 009 15 T 25 0 H 30 010 15 T 25 30 H 55 011 15 T 25 55 H 80 012 15 T 25 80 H 100 013 25 T 30 0 H 30 014...

Page 821: ...SP Numbers What They Do SP8 211 to SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server SP8 401 to SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8 691 to SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answered How is the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently Wha...

Page 822: ...s from a printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window Sometimes they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already on the document server Each counter will be discussed case by case O Other applications external network applications for example Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development...

Page 823: ...on The application Copy Fax Scan Print used to store the job on the document server for example Dev Counter Development Count no of pages developed Dup Duplex Duplex printing on both sides Emul Emulation FC Full Color FIN Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not...

Page 824: ...h allows a service center to monitor machines remotely NRS is used overseas CSS is used in Japan Org Original for scanning OrgJam Original Jam Palm 2 Print Job Manager Desk Top Editor A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network and allows files to moved around combined and converted to different formats PC Personal Computer PGS Pages A page...

Page 825: ...mail Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow Magenta Cyan Black All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear 8 001 T Total Jobs CTL 8 002 C Total Jobs CTL 8 003 F Total Jobs CTL These SPs count the number...

Page 826: ...e broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations If one transmission generates an error then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed A printed fax report counts as one job for the F counter The F counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving When a copy job on the docu...

Page 827: ...t job is sent to the document server the P counter increments When a network application sends data to the document server the O counter increments When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server the O counter increments When a fax is sent to the document server the F counter increments 8 021 T Pjob LS CTL 8 022 C Pjob LS CTL 8 023 F Pjob LS CTL 8 024 P Pjob LS CTL 8 025 S Pjob LS CTL 8...

Page 828: ...ements When a fax on the document server is printed the F counter increments 8 031 T Pjob DesApl CTL 8 032 C Pjob DesApl CTL 8 033 F Pjob DesApl CTL 8 034 P Pjob DesApl CTL 8 035 S Pjob DesApl CTL 8 036 L Pjob DesApl CTL 8 037 O Pjob DesApl CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs printed ...

Page 829: ...CTL 8 053 F TX Jobs DesApl CTL 8 054 P TX Jobs DesApl CTL 8 055 S TX Jobs DesApl CTL 8 056 L TX Jobs DesApl CTL 8 057 O TX Jobs DesApl CTL These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax Jobs merged for sending are counted separately 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the numb...

Page 830: ...otal finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode O FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application 8 06x 1 Sort Number of ...

Page 831: ... 0 1 8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job P Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job S Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job L Jobs PGS ...

Page 832: ... as one job If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job then the job is counted at the time the error occurs For copy jobs SP 8072 and scan jobs SP 8075 the total is calculated by multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned One duplex page counts as 2 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of page...

Page 833: ...lso increments The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent T IFAX TX Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 121 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent either directly or using a file stored on the document server as fax images using I Fax Note Color fax sending is not available at this time F IFAX TX Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 123 These...

Page 834: ...scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router Scan to Email or Scan to PC or if one job is sent to more than one destination each send ...

Page 835: ...when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job T Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 151 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts S Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 155 These SPs count the total...

Page 836: ...nd sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier 8 161 T PCFAX TX Jobs CTL 8 163 F PCFAX TX Jobs CTL 8 175 S Dvliv Jobs WSD CTL 8 181 T Scan to Media Jobs CTL 8 185 S Scan to Media Jobs CTL x 1 B W x 2 Color x 3 ACS SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages not the number of physical pages These counters do not count reading user stamp data or reading co...

Page 837: ...lay F LSize Scan PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 203 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax transmission Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display S LSize Scan PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 205 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax tran...

Page 838: ...F that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up 8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanni...

Page 839: ...2side If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode The user cannot select mixed sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is ...

Page 840: ...eration panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 24x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 2 Text Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 8 24x 5 Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes 8 24x 6 Normal Detail Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 7 Fine Super Fine Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 8 Binary Yes No No Yes No 8 2...

Page 841: ...ures have been used A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 261 T Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 262 C Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 266 L Scn PGS ColCr CTL 8 26x 1 Color Conversion 8 26x 2 Color Erase 8...

Page 842: ... all applications Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 441 C Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 F Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 303 These SPs count by size ...

Page 843: ...3 8 30x 2 A4 8 30x 3 A5 8 30x 4 B4 8 30x 5 B5 8 30x 6 DLT 8 30x 7 LG 8 30x 8 LT 8 30x 9 HLT 8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other Standard 8 30x 255 Other Custom T Scan PGS Rez CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings S Scan PGS Rez CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 315 These SPs count by resolution s...

Page 844: ...unter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A3 DLT page is counted as 2 When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored are counted for the applicat...

Page 845: ...mented The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 0 to 9999999 0 1 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L count Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F count 8 411 Prints Duplex CTL This SP counts the amount of paper front back counted as 1 page used for...

Page 846: ...ings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application L PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 426 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 427 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number ...

Page 847: ...es that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 5 3 5 4 6 4 6 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 8 4 T PrtPGS ImgEdt CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below ...

Page 848: ...r applications 8 43x 1 Cover Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2 8 43x 2 Series Book The number of pages printed in series one side or printed as a book with booklet right left pagination 8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied including page numbering and date stamping T PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL...

Page 849: ...r of pages printed by the scanner application L PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 4...

Page 850: ... 8 451 9 Tray 8 Currently not used 8 451 10 Tray 9 Currently not used T PrtPGS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 461 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets c...

Page 851: ...ber pages printed by the printer application L PrtPGS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 46x 1 Normal 8 46x 2 Recycled 8 46x 3 Special 8 46x 4 Thick 8 46x 5 Normal Back 8 46x 6 Thick Back 8 46x 7 OHP 8 46x 8 Other PrtPGS Mag CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 471 These SPs count by magn...

Page 852: ...n adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 8 481 T PrtPGS TonSave CTL 8 484 P PrtPGS TonSave CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on Note These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print ...

Page 853: ...y the print application 8 50x 1 B W 8 50x 2 Mono Color 8 50x 3 Full Color 8 50x 4 Single Color 8 50x 5 Two Color T PrtPGS Emul CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed P PrtPGS Emul CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2 RPDL 8 514 3 PS3 8 514 4 R98 8 5...

Page 854: ...y all applications C PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application F PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application NOTE Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available P PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 524 Th...

Page 855: ...or finishing and the stack is too large for stapling the unstapled pages are still counted The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray so jam recoveries are counted 8 531 Staples CTL This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine 0 to 9999999 0 1 T Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless of the ...

Page 856: ...8 581 10 Total Color 8 581 11 Total B W 8 581 12 Full Color A3 8 581 13 Full Color B4 JIS or Smaller 8 581 14 Full Color Print 8 581 15 Mono Color Print 8 581 16 Full Color GPC 8 582 C Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output 8 582 1 B W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F Counter CTL 0 to 999999...

Page 857: ...oken down by color output 8 584 1 B W 8 584 2 Mono Color 8 584 3 Full Color 8 584 4 Single Color 8 584 5 Two Color 8 586 L Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output 8 582 1 B W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color O Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3 DLT paper use number of d...

Page 858: ...F FAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 633 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number 8 63x 1 B W 8 63x 2 Color If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages If a d...

Page 859: ...e is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination T S to Email PGS CTL 0 to 9999...

Page 860: ...y For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a total of 20 T Deliv PGS Svr CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications Deliv PGS Svr CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 665 These SPs count...

Page 861: ...unts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application from the PC through the copier to the destination When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting the pages are only counted once For example a 10 page fax is sent to location A and location B The counter goes up by 10 not 20 8 691 T TX PGS LS CTL 8 692 C TX PGS LS CTL 8 693 F TX PGS LS CTL 8 694 P TX PGS LS CTL 8 695 S T...

Page 862: ...TX PGS Port CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them For example if a 3 page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4 the count for ISDN G3 G4 is 12 8 701 1 PSTN 1 8 701 2 PSTN 2 8 701 3 PSTN 3 8 701 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 701 5 Network 8 711 T Scan PGS Comp CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 S Scan PGS Comp CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 715 These SPs cou...

Page 863: ... PSTN 2 8 741 3 PSTN 3 8 741 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 741 5 Network Dev Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners 8 771 1 Total 8 771 2 K 8 771 3 Y 8 771 4 M 8 771 5 C Toner Bottle Info CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles NOTE Currently the data ...

Page 864: ...CTL 0 to 100 0 1 8 801 These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time Note This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply 1 steps is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 10 steps 8 801 1 K 8 801 2 Y 8 801 3 M 8 801 4 C Coverage Count 0 10 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 851 ...

Page 865: ... to 9999999 0 1 8 861 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11 to 20 8 861 1 BK 8 861 2 Y 8 861 3 M 8 861 4 C Coverage Count 21 30 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 871 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 8 871 1 BK 8 871 2 Y 8 871 3 M 8 871 4 C Coverage Count 31 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 881 The...

Page 866: ...maining current toner for each color 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C Printing PGS Log Latest 1 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color 8 901 1 BK 8 901 2 Y 8 901 3 M 8 901 4 C Printing PGS Log Latest 2 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color 8 911 1 BK ...

Page 867: ...hine Status CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards 8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time Does not include time while controller is saving data to HDD while engine is not operating 8 941 2 Standby ...

Page 868: ...rors have been staying 8 941 7 PrtJam Total time when paper jams have been staying during printing 8 941 8 OrgJam Total time when original jams have been staying during scanning 8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying AddBook Register CTL 8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration 8 951 1 User Code User code registrations 8 9...

Page 869: ...pplication registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 10 Scanner Program Scanner application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 Adomin Counter List CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 999 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 8 999 1 Total 8 999 2 Copy Full Color 8 999 3 Copy BW 8 999 4 Copy Single Color 8 999 5 Copy Two Color 8 999 ...

Page 870: ...age 8 999 101 Transmission Total Color 8 999 102 Transmission Total BW 8 999 103 FAX Transmission 8 999 104 Scanner Transmission Color 8 999 105 Scanner Transmission BW 9 1 2 INPUT CHECK TABLE When entering the Input Check mode 8 digits display the result for a section Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or ...

Page 871: ... Lock 5803 7 Fusing Fan LOCK Normal Lock 5803 8 Dev Front Fan LOCK Normal Lock 5803 9 Dev Rear Fan LOCK Normal Lock 5803 10 Fusing Exit Fan LOCK Normal Lock 5803 11 LD Unit FAN LOCK Normal Lock 5803 12 Jun Gate SOL Fan LOCK Normal Lock 5803 13 Fusing New Detection New Not new 5803 14 Fusing Area Detection 5803 15 Zero Cross Not detected Detected 5803 16 Regist Sensor Paper detected No paper detect...

Page 872: ...t set Set 5803 28 Mechanical Counter FC Not set Set 5803 29 Key Counter Set Sensor Set Not set 5803 30 Key Card Set Sensor Set Not set 5803 31 Toner End Sensor K End Not end 5803 32 Toner End Sensor C End Not end 5803 33 Toner End Sensor M End Not end 5803 34 Toner End Sensor Y End Not end 5803 35 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected 5803 36 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected No ...

Page 873: ... Sensor Not HP HP 5803 49 Tray1 Paper End Sensor Not end End 5803 50 Tray2 Paper End Sensor Not end End 5803 51 Bypass Paper End Sensor Not end End 5803 52 Tray1 Set SW Set Not set 5803 53 Tray2 Set SW Set Not set 5803 54 Interlock SW 1 Door close Door open 5803 55 Interlock SW 2 Door close Door open 5803 56 DIP SW 5803 57 BCU Version 5803 58 PCU T Collect Motor Set Not set Set 5803 59 Reserve Fan...

Page 874: ...5803 82 1T PFU Paper End Sn Not end End 5803 83 2T PFU Upper Size Sns 5803 84 2T PFU Lower Size Sns See Table 4 below 5803 85 2T PFU Upper Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 86 2T PFU Lower Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 87 2T PFU Upper Paper Height Sn 5803 88 2T PFU Lower Paper Height Sn 5803 89 2T PFU Right Cover SW Open Close 5803 90 2T PFU Upper PE Sn Not end End 58...

Page 875: ...d 6007 6 Original Width Sn L Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 7 Original Width Sn LL Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 9 Original Set Sn Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 11 Skew Correction Sn Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 13 Registration Sn Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 14 Exit Sn Paper not detected Paper...

Page 876: ...Switch Close Open 6120 13 Punch Unit Area Detect2 6120 14 Punch Unit Area Detect1 See Table 5 below 6120 15 Paper Stack Sensor 2 HP Not HP 6120 16 Paper Stack Sensor 1 HP Not HP 6120 17 Punch Position Sensor Not HP HP 6120 18 Paper Width Sensor A3 Paper not detected Paper detected 6120 19 Paper Width Sensor LD Paper not detected Paper detected 6120 20 Paper Width Sensor B4 Paper not detected Paper...

Page 877: ...31 Staple Empty Sensor No staple Staple detected 6120 32 Punch Unit Sensor Not set Set Table 1 Paper Size Switch Tray 1 2 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Bit North America Europe Asia 2 1 0 11 x 17 SEF 1 A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 11 x 17 SEF 1 0 0 8 5 x 14 SEF 2 B4 SEF B4 SEF 2 8 5 x 14 SEF 0 0 0 A4 SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 1 1 1 B5 SEF B5 SEF 1 1 0 11 ...

Page 878: ...ray 2 4 The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10 5 x 7 25 LEF depending on the setting of SP 5 181 004 Tray 1 or SP 5 181 008 Tray 2 Table 2 Paper Size By pass Table 0 ON 1 OFF By pass Paper Size Sensor bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Length Sensor NA EU ASIA 1 1 0 0 0 HLT SEF B6 SEF 1 1 1 1 0 HLT SEF A5 SEF 1 1 1 0 0 HLT SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1 1 LT LG SEF 1 A4 SEF 0 0 1 1 0 LT LG SEF 1 A5 LEF 1 0 0 1 1 DLT SEF A3...

Page 879: ...B5 LEF O O X X X 00000000 A4 SEF 11 x 8 5 O X X O X 00000010 B5 SEF X X X O X 00000010 A5 LEF SEF 5 5 x 8 5 8 5 x 5 5 X X X X X 00000000 Table 4 Paper Size Switch Tray 3 4 Bit 0 is used for tray set detection 0 Set 1 Not set 0 Not Interrupted 1 Interrupted Models Bit North America Europe Asia 3 2 1 0 11 x 17 SEF 1 A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 11 x 17 SEF 0 1 1 0 8 5 x 14 SEF 2 B4 SEF B4 SEF 2 8 5 x 14 SEF 1 1 ...

Page 880: ...or SP 5 181 015 Tray 4 3 The machine detects either 11 x 81 2 LEF or A4 LEF depending on the setting of SP 5 181 009 Tray 3 or SP 5 181 013 Tray 4 4 The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10 5 x 7 25 LEF depending on the setting of SP 5 181 012 Tray 3 or SP 5 181 016 Tray 4 Table 5 Area Display The bit 0 of these SPs shows the punch unit type 2 2 Holes 2 3 2 3 Holes 4 EU 4 Holes Europe 4 Scan 4 Hole...

Page 881: ...m s 5804 10 Paper Feed M2 CW 120mm s 5804 11 Paper Feed M2 CW 60mm s 5804 12 P Feed M2 CW 60mm s Thick 5804 13 Paper Feed M2 CCW 190mm s 5804 14 Paper Feed M2 CCW 120mm s 5804 15 Paper Feed M2 CCW 60mm s 5804 16 P Feed M2 CCW 60mm s Thick 5804 17 Bypass M CW 190mm s 5804 18 Bypass M CW 120mm s 5804 19 Bypass M CW 60mm s 400mA 5804 20 Bypass M CW 60mm s 300mA 5804 21 Bypass M CCW 190mm s 5804 22 By...

Page 882: ...or 56mm s 5804 37 Inverter M 60mm s 5804 39 Duplex Exit M 280mm s 5804 40 Duplex Exit M 120mm s 5804 41 Duplex Exit M 60mm s 5804 42 Duplex Ent M 280mm s 5804 43 Duplex Ent M 120mm s 5804 44 Duplex Ent M 60mm s 5804 45 Color Dev M 120mm s 5804 46 Color Dev M 60mm s 5804 47 Color Drum M 120mm s 5804 48 Color Drum M 60mm s 5804 49 Bk Drum M 120mm s 5804 50 Bk Drum M 60mm s 5804 51 ITB Motor 120mm s ...

Page 883: ... 5804 60 Dev Front FAN L 5804 61 Dev Rear FAN H 5804 62 Dev Rear FAN L 5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan H 5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan L 5804 65 LD Unit Fan H 5804 66 LD Unit Fan L 5804 67 PSU Fan H 5804 69 Junc Gate SOL Fan H 5804 70 Junc Gate SOL Fan L 5804 71 Toner Supply M Bk 5804 72 Toner Supply M C 5804 73 Toner Supply M M 5804 74 Toner Supply M Y 5804 75 PCU T Collect Motor 5804 76 ID MUSIC Sn Shutter Mo...

Page 884: ...Charge AC Bk H 5804 85 HVPS Charge AC Bk L 5804 86 HVPS Charge AC C H 5804 87 HVPS Charge AC C L 5804 88 HVPS Charge AC M H 5804 89 HVPS Charge AC M L 5804 90 HVPS Charge AC Y H 5804 91 HVPS Charge AC Y L 5804 92 HVPS Charge DC Bk 5804 93 HVPS Charge DC C 5804 94 HVPS Charge DC M 5804 95 HVPS Charge DC Y 5804 96 HVPS Dev Bias Bk 5804 97 HVPS Dev Bias C 5804 98 HVPS Dev Bias M 5804 99 HVPS Dev Bias...

Page 885: ...IC Sensor C PWM 5804 108 MUSIC Sensor F PWM 5804 109 Reserve Fan H 5804 110 Reserve Fan LOCK 5804 111 Toner End Sn Power 5804 120 R Tray M 280mm s 5804 121 R Tray M 120mm s 5804 122 R Tray SOL 5804 123 Shift Motor 5804 124 1T PFU Tray Lift M 5804 125 1T PFU Paper Feed M 5804 126 1T PFU Paper Feed CL 5804 127 2T PFU Relay CL 5804 128 2T PFU Upper Feed CL 5804 129 2T PFU Lower Feed CL 5804 130 2T PF...

Page 886: ...93 RFID ON OFF C 5804 194 RFID ON OFF M 5804 195 RFID ON OFF Y 5804 196 RFID COM ON Bk 5804 197 RFID COM ON C 5804 198 RFID COM ON M 5804 199 RFID COM ON Y 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 210 Polygon Motor 5804 216 LD1 Bk 5804 218 LDI C 5804 220 LD1 M 5804 222 LD1 Y Internal Finisher D429 6121 Description Description 6121 1 Transport Motor 6121 2 Front Jogger Motor 6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor ...

Page 887: ... SOL 6121 12 Junction Gate SOL 6121 13 Fan Motor 6120 14 Punch Motor 6120 15 Punch Slide Motor 6120 16 Inverter Roller SOL ARDF D366 6008 Display Description 6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor Forward rotation 6008 6 Transport Motor Forward Relay Motor Reverse Transport Motor Reverse...

Page 888: ...with SP2 109 005 2 Magenta 3 Yellow 4 Cyan 4 When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern select the density with SP2 109 006 to 009 for each color If you select 0 with SP2 109 006 to 009 the color to be adjusted to 0 does not come up on a test pattern 5 When you are prompted to confirm your selection touch Yes to select the test pattern for printing 6 Touch Copy Window to open t...

Page 889: ... 2dot 13 Independent Pattern 4dot 3 Horizontal Line 1dot 14 Ttrimming Area 4 Horizontal Line 2dot 16 Hound s Tooth Check Horizontal 5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band Horizontal 6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band Vertical 7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checkered Flag Pattern 8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale Vertical Margin 9 Argyle Patter Small 21 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 10 Argyle Patter Large 23 Full Dot Pat...

Page 890: ...ffect I O Timeouts will never occur SD Card Save Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 4 Enable Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot Card Save Function in the System Maintenance Reference of the Field Service Manual bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU RPCS PCL Printable area frame border 0 Disable 1 Enable 001 bit 7 Enable The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the printa...

Page 891: ...bit 3 Disable The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid job Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e c If Auto PDL switching is disabled these jobs will not be printed properly bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 3 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 2 Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP m...

Page 892: ...nd configured options After enabling the function the settings will appear under User Tools Printer Features System bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU PS PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1 bit 3 Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is PS data or not Pattern3 includes most PS commands Pattern1 A small number of PS tags and headers Increase max number of the stored job...

Page 893: ...and then again at the end of the job 1 JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished printing This causes page counter to be incremented at the end of each job 1001 Bit Switch 008 Bit Switch 8 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU bit 3 PCL PS Allow BW jobs to print without requiring User Code Disable Enable Enable BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed ev...

Page 894: ...Prints the service summary sheet a summary of all the controller settings 1005 Display Version Disp Version 1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware 1006 Sample Locked Print CTL 0 Linked 1 On 1006 1 Enables and disables the document server When you select 0 the document server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5 967 When you select 1 the document server is...

Page 895: ...x 600 Photo 2400x600 Text 1800x600 Text 600x600 Text Test Page 1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment 1103 1 Color Gray Scale 1103 2 Color Pattern Gamma Adjustment 1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu 1104 1 Black Highlight 1104 2 Black Shadow 1104 3 Black Middle 1104 4 Black IDmax 1104 21 Cyan Highlight...

Page 896: ...1104 64 Yellow IDmax Save Tone Control Value 1105 Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj menu item as the current setting Before the machine stores the new current setting it moves the data currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage location 1105 1 Save Tone Control Value Toner Limit 1106 Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development 1106 1 ...

Page 897: ... Erase margin 1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin This SP is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning 1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm CTL 0 to 5 0 1 mm step 1009 Remote scan disable CTL 0 or 1 0 0 enable 1 disable 1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan 1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF CTL 0 or 1 0 ...

Page 898: ...lects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode JPEG for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2021 1 Comp 1 5 95 5 to 95 20 1 step 2021 2 Comp 2 5 95 5 to 95 40 1 step 2021 3 Comp 3 5 95 5 to 95 65 1 step 2021 4 Comp 4 5 95 5 to 95 80 1 step 2021 5 Comp 5 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 95 1 step Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF 2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearl...

Page 899: ...1 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D331 D331 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 900: ......

Page 901: ... VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR 6 1 3 2 PAPER END SENSOR 7 1 3 3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 7 1 3 4 TRAY MAIN BOARD 8 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 9 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 10 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 10 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 13 2 2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM 14 2 3 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM 15 2 4 PAPER END DETECTION 17 2 5...

Page 902: ......

Page 903: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 904: ......

Page 905: ...STMENT 1 1 COVERS AND ROLLER Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 1 1 COVERS Rear Cover 1 Hold brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 3 Right Cover 1 Right side stopper C x 3 2 Right cover D x knob screw x 2 ...

Page 906: ...Covers and Roller D331 2 SM 1 1 2 FEED ROLLER 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Release the lock lever B 3 Feed roller C ...

Page 907: ...ain power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 2 1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Bracket A x 2 3 Hold bracket B x 1 bushing x 1 4 Upper feed clutch C x 1 1 2 2 LOWER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Lower feed clutch A x 1 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 908: ...331 4 SM 1 2 3 RELAY CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Relay clutch A x 1 x 1 1 2 4 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Tray main board Tray Main Board 3 Gear A x 1 4 Paper feed motor bracket B x 5 5 Paper feed motor C x 2 ...

Page 909: ...LIFT MOTORS Upper Lift Motor 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Spring A snap ring x 1 spacer x 1 3 Lift motor bracket B x 3 x 1 4 Upper lift motor C x 3 Lower Lift Motor 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Spring snap ring x 1 spacer x 1 3 Lift motor bracket x 4 x 1 4 Lower lift motor x 3 ...

Page 910: ...NENTS Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 3 1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR 1 Open the tray cover A 2 Guide plate B x 2 3 Sensor bracket C x 1 x 1 4 Vertical transport sensor D hooks ...

Page 911: ...it PB3030 D331 1 3 2 PAPER END SENSOR 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Sensor bracket B x 1 x 1 3 Paper end sensor C hooks 1 3 3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 1 Pull out the two trays 2 Sensor bracket cover A x 1 3 Sensor bracket B x 3 x 2 4 Paper size sensors hooks ...

Page 912: ...Electrical Components D331 8 SM 1 3 4 TRAY MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Tray main board A x 4 all s ...

Page 913: ...t PB3030 D331 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper paper feed roller 2 Lower paper feed roller 3 Lower bottom plate 4 Optional tray heater 5 Lower tray 6 Upper tray 7 Upper bottom plate ...

Page 914: ...elay clutch 9 Tray cover switch 10 Lower paper feed clutch 11 Lower paper height 2 sensor 12 Lower paper height 1 sensor 13 Vertical transport sensor 14 Lower tray set switch 15 Lower paper end sensor 16 Upper paper end sensor 17 Optional tray heater 18 Lower lift motor 19 Lower paper size sensors 20 Lower lift sensor 21 Upper paper size sensors 22 Tray main board 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRI...

Page 915: ... copier printer when the upper tray runs out of paper 16 S4 Lower Paper End Informs the copier printer when the lower tray runs out of paper 15 S5 Vertical Transport Detects misfeeds 13 S6 Upper Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 6 S7 Upper Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 5 S8 Lower Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray ...

Page 916: ...tects whether the lower tray is opened or not 14 Magnetic Clutches MC1 Upper Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the upper tray 7 MC2 Lower Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the lower tray 10 MC3 Relay Drives the relay rollers 8 PCBs PCB1 Tray Main Controls the paper tray unit and communicates with the copier printer 22 Others H1 Optional Tray Heater Removes humidity from the paper in the trays 17 ...

Page 917: ... 13 D331 Paper Tray Unit PB3030 D331 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Paper feed motor 2 Drive belt 3 Upper paper feed clutch 4 Relay clutch 5 Lower paper feed clutch 6 Upper paper feed roller 7 Relay roller 8 Lower paper feed roller ...

Page 918: ...RATION MECHANISM The paper tray holds 500 sheets The paper feed roller A drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier printer The friction pad B allows only one sheet to feed at a time The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring C ...

Page 919: ... plate pressure lever The lift motor turns on and turns clockwise as viewed on the diagram The main pressure spring H pulls the bottom plate pressure lever and this lifts the tray bottom plate When the top of the stack touches the feed roller the motor cannot pull up the plate any more so it pulls the actuator G into the lift sensor F The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high so...

Page 920: ...ift Mechanism D331 16 SM the bottom plate drops To make it easier to push the tray in the lift motor rotates backwards 1 7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling D to the original position ...

Page 921: ...tack raises the paper end feeler A and the paper end sensor B is deactivated When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up ...

Page 922: ...f sensor signals is sent to the copier printer Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Near End OFF ON 30 ON ON 70 ON OFF 100 OFF OFF When the tray contains paper of a small width the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper rem...

Page 923: ...nce C is adjusted for the installed paper To determine which size has been installed the CPU reads which paper size sensors the actuator has switched off Refer to the size detection lists as shown below EU AISA Size SN1 SN2 SN3 SP Setting A6 SEF 148 x 105 OFF ON OFF A5 LEF B5 LEF 182 x 257 ON OFF ON B6 SEF Exe LEF A4 LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF LT LEF A5 SEF HLT SEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON LT SEF ...

Page 924: ...LT LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF A4 LEF A5 SEF HLT SEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON LT SEF 279 x 216 OFF OFF OFF A4 SEF 297 x 210 ON OFF OFF LG SEF 364 x 257 ON ON ON DLT SEF 420 x 297 OFF ON ON A3 SEF The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected If the paper size actuator is broken or if there is no tray installed the Add Paper indicator will light ...

Page 925: ...ion to be incorrect To correct this each side fence has a stopper A attached to it Each side fence can be secured with a screw B for customers who do not want to change the paper size 2 7 2 END FENCE As the amount of paper in the tray decreases the bottom plate C lifts up gradually The end fence D is connected to the bottom plate When the tray bottom plate rises the end fence moves forward and pus...

Page 926: ......

Page 927: ...ARDF DF3030 D366 D366 ARDF DF3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 928: ......

Page 929: ...SORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 5 1 3 3 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR 6 1 3 4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR 6 1 3 5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 7 1 4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 8 1 4 1 FEED MOTOR 8 1 4 2 PICK UP SOLENOID 8 1 4 3 INVERTER SOLENOID 9 1 4 4 FEED CLUTCH 10 1 4 5 TRANSPORT MOTOR 11 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 12 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 2...

Page 930: ...D366 ii SM 2 2 4 SKEW CORRECTION 21 2 2 5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 22 2 2 6 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION 23 3 SERVICE TABLES 25 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 25 ...

Page 931: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 932: ......

Page 933: ...TRAY 1 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Open the left cover A 2 Open the original tray B 3 Rear cover C x 1 hook x 6 1 1 2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY 1 Open the left cover 2 Rear cover Rear Cover 3 Front cover A x 1 Keep the original tray open when you remove the front cover 4 Original tray B x 1 x 1 ...

Page 934: ...nents D366 2 SM 1 2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS 1 2 1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit A 1 2 2 PICK UP ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit Original Feed Unit 3 Pick up roller A x 1 ...

Page 935: ... 1 2 3 FEED BELT 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit Original Feed Unit 3 Feed belt cover A spring x 1 When reassembling the feed belt cover make sure that the projection B of the feed belt cover is on the guide plate rear C 4 Belt tension unit D ...

Page 936: ...Document Feed Components D366 4 SM 5 Feed belt E 1 2 4 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Separation roller cover A 3 Separation roller B x 1 ...

Page 937: ...VE BOARD AND DF POSITION SENSOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 ARDF drive board A x 3 all s 3 DF position sensor with bracket B x 1 x 1 4 DF position sensor C hook x 2 1 3 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 1 Original Tray see Front Cover and Original Tray 2 Tray cover A x 3 ...

Page 938: ...he Original Feed Unit 3 Original Tray see the Original Tray 4 Original feed in guide plate A x 3 5 Original set sensor bracket B x 1 6 Original set sensor C 1 3 4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR 1 Original feed in guide plate see Original Set Sensor 2 Original turn guide plate A hook x 1 3 Original width sensors B x 1 each and skew correction sensor C with bracket ...

Page 939: ...0 D366 x 1 x 1 1 3 5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the ARDF 2 Remove the left edge of the platen sheet 3 Release the hook A 4 Open the original exit guide plate B 5 Stamp solenoid C x 1 x 1 6 Original exit sensor D x 1 hook x 1 ...

Page 940: ... D366 8 SM 1 4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 1 4 1 FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Feed motor with bracket A x 2 x 1 spring x 1 3 Feed motor B x 2 1 4 2 PICK UP SOLENOID 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide A all s ...

Page 941: ...eed Drive SM 9 D366 ARDF DF3030 D366 3 Pick up solenoid B x 2 x 1 1 4 3 INVERTER SOLENOID 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Inverter solenoid A x 2 x 1 x 1 gear x 1 gear cover x 1 ...

Page 942: ...Original Feed Drive D366 10 SM 1 4 4 FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Bracket A x 2 x 3 x 1 bushing x 1 spring x 1 4 Slide the bracket 5 Feed clutch B x 1 ...

Page 943: ...D366 ARDF DF3030 D366 1 4 5 TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Left cover sensor with bracket A x 1 x 1 4 Transport motor with bracket B x 2 x 1 spring x 1 5 Transport motor C x 2 ...

Page 944: ...Belt 3 Pick up Roller 4 Original Trailing Edge Sensor 5 Original Tray 6 Original Length Sensor 1 7 Original Length Sensor 2 8 Original Length Sensor 3 9 Inverter Roller 10 Junction Gate 11 Exit Roller 12 Original Exit Sensor 13 Transport Roller 14 Registration Roller 15 Registration Sensor 16 Skew Correction Roller 17 Skew Correction Sensor ...

Page 945: ...3030 D366 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT Sensors 1 Original Width Sensor 2 Skew Correction Sensor 3 Registration Sensor 4 Cover Sensor 5 Original Set Sensor 6 Exit Sensor 7 Original Sensor 8 Original Length Sensor 9 DF Position Sensor ...

Page 946: ...d belt separation pick up and reverse table rollers 5 M2 Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 1 Sensors S9 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not 9 S5 Skew Correction Detects the leading edge of the original to turn off the DF feed and transport motors 2 S8 Registration Detects the original exposure timing and checks for original misfeeds 3 S10 Cover Sensor Detects whether ...

Page 947: ...it Detects the leading edge of the original to turn on the junction gate solenoid and checks for original misfeeds Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn off the transport and feed motor and junction gate solenoid In single sided mode used to detect original misfeeds 6 S11 Original Detects the trailing edge of the last original to stop copy paper feed and to turn off the transport motor...

Page 948: ... drive signals from the copier 6 2 1 3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Feed Motor 2 Pick up Roller 3 Separation Roller 4 Feed Belt 5 Skew Correction Roller 6 Feed Clutch 7 Transport Motor 8 Exit Roller 9 Registration Roller Feed Motor Drives the feed belt separation pick up and skew correction rollers Transport Motor Drives the registration and exit rollers ...

Page 949: ...Sensor M H Width Sensor L I Width Sensor LL and three original length sensors C Length Sensor S D Length Sensor M E Length Sensor L Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors the machine can detect the size of the original This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table below Width Sensor Length Sensor Area Size S M L LL S M L LT A B A3 SEF 297 x 420 ON O...

Page 950: ...Paper present LT North America A B Europe Asia For O mark which has superscripted number it is possible to change the original detection size with SP6 016 For example instead of LT O3 the machine can be set up to detect 10 x 8 3 The F size can be selected with SP5 126 The default is 8 5 x 13 The machine cannot detect more than one size of original in the same job 2 2 2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE Thi...

Page 951: ...mined before the image is scanned Auto Reduce Enlarge Centering Erase Center Border Booklet Image Repeat The originals follow this path 1 Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table 2 Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table restores the original order 3 Inverter table Scanning glass image scanned Exit tray Normal feed in In a copy mode other than those listed above when the reduction enlar...

Page 952: ...d unit A moves down At the same time the pick up solenoid is activated and the original table lifts until the original comes in contact with the pick up roller B The pick up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper After being fed from feed belt C the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller D and sent to the skew correction roller The mechanism is an FRR system consistin...

Page 953: ...n the leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller skew in the original is removed A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor A the feed motor B turns off for 40 ms and rotates in reverse At this time the skew correction roller C and the feed belt both turn and original feed continues The original is fed by the skew correction roller aft...

Page 954: ...iginal exposure guide B and DF exposure glass C After scanning the original is fed out by the transport roller D and exit roller E Double Sided Originals After skew correction the feed and transport motors drive the skew correction roller A registration roller B transport roller C and the exit roller D The front side of the original is then scanned When the original exit sensor detects the leading...

Page 955: ...it tray G in the correct order Original Sensor During one to one copying copy paper is fed to the skew correction roller in advance while the original is still being scanned to increase the copy speed The original sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra...

Page 956: ...s on too long The exit sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its length x 1 5 after the exit sensor turned on The skew correction sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by transport path length x 1 5 The registration sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by transport path length x 1 5 after the skew correction sensor turned on Sensor does not come on...

Page 957: ...ee run No original Two sided mode 100 speed 0 1 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 1 Free run With original One sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 1 Transport Motor ...

Page 958: ......

Page 959: ...Internal Shift Tray SH3040 D388 D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY PB3040 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 960: ......

Page 961: ...Internal Shift Tray SH3040 D388 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 TRAY COVER 1 When Attaching the Tray Cover 1 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 2 ...

Page 962: ......

Page 963: ...dure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring Clamp E ring ...

Page 964: ......

Page 965: ...ft side of the cover When Attaching the Tray Cover The right side of the tray cover should be attached first 1 Fit the pawls C on the shift tray 2 Align the square D so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover 3 Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls B into place ...

Page 966: ...Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board D388 2 SM 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 1 Top cover p 1 Tray Cover 2 Slip disc A 3 Tray motor B x 1 4 Half turn sensor board C x 1 ...

Page 967: ...PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 D425 D425 ONE BIN TRAY BN3070 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 968: ......

Page 969: ...ENT 1 1 1 COVERS AND ROLLER 1 1 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 2 FEED ROLLER 1 1 2 MOTORS AND CLUTCH 2 1 2 1 PAPER FEED MOTOR 2 1 2 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR 3 1 2 3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 4 1 2 4 MAIN BOARD 4 1 3 SENSORS AND BOARD 5 1 3 1 PAPER END SENSOR 5 1 3 2 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 5 1 3 3 TRAY MAIN BOARD 6 ...

Page 970: ......

Page 971: ... Feed Unit PB3070 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS AND ROLLER 1 1 1 COVERS 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2 3 Rear right cover C x 1 1 1 2 FEED ROLLER 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Release the lock lever B 3 Feed roller C ...

Page 972: ...e machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 2 1 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear Cover Rear Cover 2 Release the harness B x 2 3 Paper feed motor with the bracket A x 3 x 2 x 1 Note Move the lever B in the red circle as shown above when removing the paper feed motor with the bracket ...

Page 973: ... Feed Unit PB3070 4 Paper feed motor bracket A x 3 5 Paper feed motor B 1 2 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Pull out the Tray 2 Rear cover Rear Cover 3 Rear right cover Rear Right Cover 4 Stay A x 2 5 Rear right bracket A x 1 6 Tray end cover B x 1 x 1 ...

Page 974: ...425 4 SM 7 Transport motor A x 3 x 1 1 2 3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear Cover Rear Cover 2 Rear right bracket Transport Motor 3 Paper feed clutch A x 1 x 1 x 1 1 2 4 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Main board A All s x 4 ...

Page 975: ...tch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 3 1 PAPER END SENSOR 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Sensor bracket B x 1 x 1 3 Paper end sensor C hooks 1 3 2 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 1 Pull out the tray 2 Sensor bracket cover A x 1 3 Sensor bracket B x 3 x 2 4 Paper size sensor hooks ...

Page 976: ...Sensors and Board D425 6 SM 1 3 3 TRAY MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Main board A All s x 4 ...

Page 977: ...1 BIN TRAY BN3060 D426 D426 ONE BIN TRAY BN3060 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 978: ......

Page 979: ... BN3060 D426 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 1 1 BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR 1 When reinstalling these sensors 2 1 1 2 1 BIN TRAY CONTROL BOARD 2 1 1 3 LED BOARD 3 ...

Page 980: ......

Page 981: ...nts SM 1 D426 D426 1 Bin Tray BN3060 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 1 BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR 1 1 Bin tray unit 2 1 bin tray bottom cover A x 2 3 Sensor assembly A x 1 x 2 x 2 ...

Page 982: ...esses from the 1 bin tray control board to each sensor The blue connector from the 1 bin tray control board must be connected to the paper sensor The white connector from the 1 bin tray control board must be connected to the 1 bin tray exit sensor 1 1 2 1 BIN TRAY CONTROL BOARD 1 1 bin tray unit 2 1 bin tray bottom cover 1 Bin Tray Exit Sensor and Paper Sensor 3 1 bin tray control board A x 1 x 3 ...

Page 983: ...Electrical Components SM 3 D426 D426 1 Bin Tray BN3060 1 1 3 LED BOARD 1 1 bin tray unit 2 1 bin tray bottom cover 1 Bin Tray Exit Sensor and Paper Sensor 3 LED board x 1 x 1 ...

Page 984: ......

Page 985: ...SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 D427 D427 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 986: ......

Page 987: ...SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 D427 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 1 1 2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR 1 1 1 3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID 2 1 1 4 SIDE TRAY BOARD 3 ...

Page 988: ......

Page 989: ...e Tray Type C2550 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Side tray paper exit unit 2 Sensor assembly A x 2 x 3 x 1 3 Side tray exit sensor A hooks 1 1 2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR 1 Side tray paper exit unit ...

Page 990: ...ts D427 2 SM 2 Side tray upper cover A x 2 tab B Release the tab B with a flat head screwdriver 3 Side tray motor A x 2 x 1 1 1 3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID 1 Side tray paper exit unit 2 Side tray upper cover Side Tray Motor ...

Page 991: ...27 Side Tray Type C2550 3 Side tray gate solenoid assembly A x 2 x 1 x 1 4 Side tray gate solenoid A x 2 spring x 1 1 1 4 SIDE TRAY BOARD 1 Side tray paper exit unit 2 Side tray upper cover Side Tray Motor 3 Side tray board A x 1 x all ...

Page 992: ......

Page 993: ...INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 D428 D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 994: ......

Page 995: ...SM i D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 D428 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 TRAY COVER 1 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 2 ...

Page 996: ......

Page 997: ...left side of the cover When Attaching the Tray Cover The right side of the tray cover should be attached first 1 Fit the pawls C on the shift tray 2 Align the square D so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover 3 Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls B into place ...

Page 998: ...Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board D428 2 SM 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 1 Top cover Tray Cover 2 Slip disc A 3 Tray motor B x 1 4 Half turn sensor board C x 1 ...

Page 999: ...INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 D429 D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1000: ......

Page 1001: ...ing the output tray lower cover 2 1 1 4 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT 3 1 2 MOTORS 5 1 2 1 PICK UP ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR 5 1 2 2 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MOTOR 5 1 3 STAPLER UNIT 7 1 4 SENSORS 9 1 4 1 MAIN UNIT 9 Relay Sensor 9 Belt Roller Position Sensor 9 Stapler Safety Sensor 10 Stapler Unit HP Sensor 10 1 4 2 INVERTER UNIT 11 Entrance Sensor 11 1 5 FAN 12 1 5 1 FRONT FAN 12 1 6 MAIN BOARD 13 1 7 PUNCH UNIT 14 ...

Page 1002: ......

Page 1003: ...dure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 1004: ......

Page 1005: ...S The finisher must be removed from the machine for these procedures except Output Tray Lower Cover removal procedure The following covers cannot be removed while the finisher is attached to the machine 1 1 1 REAR LEFT REAR AND REAR INNER COVER 1 Rear cover A x 1 2 Left rear cover B x 2 3 Rear inner cover C x 1 ...

Page 1006: ...COVER 1 Remove the knob A 2 Front cover B x 2 1 1 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER COVER 1 Output tray lower cover A x 3 When installing the output tray lower cover 1 The two projections A of the output tray lower cover this plate is actually attached to ...

Page 1007: ...f the output tray lower cover is correctly installed The left side picture shows the correct result and right side picture shows the incorrect result 1 1 4 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT 1 Output tray lower cover Output Tray Lower Cover 2 Rear cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 3 Left rear cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 4 Rear inner cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 5 Remove the screw ...

Page 1008: ...Common Procedures D429 4 SM 6 Disconnect the harness A CN10 and make some slack in the cable 7 Output tray unit A ...

Page 1009: ... 2 MOTORS 1 2 1 PICK UP ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR 1 Front cover Front Cover 2 Loosen the harness guide A x 2 3 Bracket with pick up roller contact motor A x 2 x 1 4 Pick up roller contact motor B x 2 1 2 2 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MOTOR 1 Front cover Front Cover ...

Page 1010: ...Motors D429 6 SM 2 Bracket with stapler unit movement motor A x 2 spring x 1 belt 3 Two gears A x 1 4 Stapler unit movement motor A x 2 ...

Page 1011: ...NIT 1 Front cover Front Cover 2 White lever A spring x 1 hook 3 Black lever B hook 4 Shaft A x 1 Remove the green stapler cartridge first to make this step more easy 5 Move the stapler unit A to the center 6 Stand the internal finisher B as shown above 7 Remove two screws ...

Page 1012: ...Stapler Unit D429 8 SM Note Make sure that the end fences A are placed as shown above when replacing the stapler unit 8 Move the stapler unit to the rear side and then remove the stapler unit A x 2 ...

Page 1013: ...29 Internal Finisher Type C2550 1 4 SENSORS 1 4 1 MAIN UNIT Relay Sensor 1 Relay sensor A hook x 1 Belt Roller Position Sensor 1 Rear cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 2 Front cover Front Cover 3 Top bracket A x 6 ...

Page 1014: ...cket A x 1 5 Belt roller position sensor B hook x 1 Stapler Safety Sensor 1 Stapler unit Stapler Unit 2 Stapler safety sensor A x 1 hook Stapler Unit HP Sensor 1 Front cover Front Cover 2 Bracket with stapler unit HP sensor x 1 3 Stapler unit HP sensor A hook x 1 ...

Page 1015: ...Sensors SM 11 D429 D429 Internal Finisher Type C2550 1 4 2 INVERTER UNIT Entrance Sensor 1 Bracket with entrance sensor x 1 2 Entrance sensor A x 1 hook ...

Page 1016: ...Fan D429 12 SM 1 5 FAN 1 5 1 FRONT FAN 1 Front fan A x 2 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 1017: ...in Board SM 13 D429 D429 Internal Finisher Type C2550 1 6 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 2 Left rear cover Rear Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover 3 Main board x 2 clip x 2 x all ...

Page 1018: ... removed from the internal finisher for this procedure 1 7 1 PUNCH SLIDER UNIT 1 Brackets A and ground plate B at the right side of the punch unit x 1 each 2 Brackets A at the left side of the punch unit x 1 each 3 Harness bracket A x 4 4 Wire guide cover B x 1 ...

Page 1019: ...Punch Unit SM 15 D429 D429 Internal Finisher Type C2550 5 Positioning pins A x 3 spring 6 Punch slider unit A x all ...

Page 1020: ......

Page 1021: ...D433 D432 D433 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550 C2530 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 35 10 05 2009 Error Code 31 21 added 132 12 12 2008 Service Ram Addresses 133 02 02 2009 Service Ram Addresses 134 12 12 2008 Service Ram Addresses ...

Page 1022: ......

Page 1023: ...UNIT G578 D432 ONLY 10 1 3 2 HANDSET B433 10 D037 D041 with the internal finisher 13 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 14 2 1 FCU 14 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 15 3 1 ERROR CODES 15 3 2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING 36 3 3 IP FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 39 3 3 1 IP FAX TRANSMISSION 39 Cannot send by IP Address Host Name 39 Cannot send via VoIP Gateway 40 Cannot send by Alias Fax number 41 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION 42 Cannot receiv...

Page 1024: ...CHES 66 4 3 3 PRINTER SWITCHES 72 4 3 4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES 79 4 3 5 G3 SWITCHES 87 4 3 6 IP FAX SWITCHES 97 4 4 NCU PARAMETERS 105 4 5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 121 4 5 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 121 4 5 2 PARAMETERS 121 Fax Parameters 121 E mail Parameters 125 4 6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 129 5 SPECIFICATIONS 139 5 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 139 5 1 1 FCU 139 5 1 2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABL...

Page 1025: ...dure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 1026: ......

Page 1027: ...lowing list No Description Q ty 1 FCU 1 2 G3 Decal 1 3 Ferrite Core 1 4 Serial Number Decal 1 5 Fax Keytop 1 6 Data Display Decal Sheet 18 languages ASIA only 1 7 Handset Bracket NA only 1 8 Telephone Cord NA only 1 9 Handset Support Bracket NA only 1 10 Screw M3x6 NA only 2 11 Clamp 1 NA only 1 12 FCC Decal NA only 1 TEL Cap NA only 1 1 Item No 11 is used only when the internal finisher D429 is i...

Page 1028: ...sh the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode Make sure the power LED is off turn the main switch off and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet 1 For NA models attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe 2 Remove the FCU cover A x 2 ...

Page 1029: ... the jumper B set to OFF and set it to ON The machine may issue SC819 or SC820 if the jumper is not set to ON correctly Sometimes these SC codes are not issued 5 Install the FCU A x 2 removed in step 3 6 Write the serial number of the fax unit on the serial number decal and then attach this decal to the bracket B of the fax unit 7 Attach the ferrite core to the telephone cord ...

Page 1030: ... TEL jack if the handset will not be installed 10 Remove dummy keytop A and replace it with the Fax keytop B 11 Attach the Super G3 decal A 12 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch After you turn the machine on if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM turn the machine off and on again to clear the message 13 Enter the User Tools mod...

Page 1031: ... Option Type C2550 C2530 14 Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit 15 Enter the correct country code with SP1101 016 System SW 0F Country area code for functional settings 16 Exit the SP mode and turn the machine off and on ...

Page 1032: ...the following list No Description Q ty 1 FCU 1 2 G3 Decal 1 3 Serial Number Decal 1 4 Fax Operation Panel 1 Fax Operation Decal Sheet 1 1 2 2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Before installation print out all data in the printer buffer Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode Make sure the power LED is off turn the main switch off and then disconnect the power cord and the net...

Page 1033: ...a properly grounded socket outlet 1 Remove the FCU cover A x 2 2 Press down the MBU A Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly If not SC672 occurs 3 Remove the jumper B set to OFF and set it to ON The machine may issue SC819 or SC820 if the jumper is not set to ON correctly Sometimes these SC codes are not issued ...

Page 1034: ...ord to the LINE jack 7 Only for NA models install the TEL cap in the TEL jack if the handset will not be installed 8 Slide the dummy cover A to the left side with a flat head screwdriver and then remove it hooks 9 Put the fax operation panel A on the left edge of the copier s operation panel and then slide it to the right side 10 Attach the fax function decal at the location B 11 Attach an appropr...

Page 1035: ...essage that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM turn the machine off and on again to clear the message 14 Enter the User Tools mode and set date and time 15 Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit 16 Enter the correct country code with SP1101 016 System SW 0F Country area code for functional settings 17 Exit the SP mode and turn the ma...

Page 1036: ...MORY UNIT G578 D432 ONLY 1 Remove the FCU from the machine 2 Install the memory option A on the FCU 3 Reinstall the FCU in the machine 1 3 2 HANDSET B433 The optional handset is available for the U S version only 1 Remove the screw A first and the rear cover B x7 ...

Page 1037: ...ptions SM 11 D432 D433 D432 D433 Fax Option Type C2550 C2530 2 Remove the scanner left cover C x 2 3 Make two holes D in the scanner left cover 4 Attach the handset support bracket E inside the scanner left cover ...

Page 1038: ...12 SM 5 Secure the handset bracket F x 2 M3x6 in the accesories of the FCU option 6 Reattach the scanner left cover to the machine 7 Remove the label G from the handset cradle H 8 Attach the cradle to the handset bracket x 2 M3x8 ...

Page 1039: ...t the handset cable to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine D037 D041 with the internal finisher Do steps from 1 to 9 in the Handset B433 installation procedure 1 Attach the clamp A to the scanner left cover 2 Set the telephone cable B as shown above 3 Put the ferrite core C on the handset core as shown The length D must be 60 mm 4 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack at the rear of the ma...

Page 1040: ... remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board 2 Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time Do not turn off the battery switch SW1 Do SP6101 to print the system parameters and check the settings ...

Page 1041: ... may be incompatible Replace the FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training Check the li...

Page 1042: ...equalizer settings Replace the FCU The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 0 07 No post message response from the other end after a page was sent Check the line connection Replace the FCU The other end may have jammed or run out of paper The other end user may have disconnected the call Check for a ba...

Page 1043: ...ing to another machine Noisy line resend Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU Cross reference See error code 0 08 0 15 The other terminal is not capable of specific functions The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following functions or the other terminal s memory is full Confidential rx Transfer function SEP SUB PWD SID 0 16 CFR or FTT not detecte...

Page 1044: ...ignal Check the connections between the FCU and line Check for line noise or other line problems Replace the FCU The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected Cross reference Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames G3 Bit Switch 0A bit 4 0 22 The signal from the other end was interrupted for more than the acceptable modem carrier drop time default 200 ms Check the line ...

Page 1045: ...e Dedicated tx parameters Section 4 0 32 The other terminal sent a DCS which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle Check the protocol dump list Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer 0 33 The data reception not ECM is not completed within 10 minutes Check the line connection The other terminal may have a defective modem FCU 0 52 Polarity changed during communication...

Page 1046: ... could not detect ANSam Check the line connection and condition Try receiving a call from another V 8 V 34 fax 0 76 The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a JM in response to CM CM timeout The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise etc Check the line connection and condition Try making a call to another V 8 V 34 fax 0 77 The called terminal fell back to...

Page 1047: ...lizer setting If these errors happen at the receiving terminal Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting Try increasing the tx level Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders 0 84 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 phase 4 control channel start up The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn...

Page 1048: ...place the FCU 2 12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU 2 13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine then turn it back on Update the modem ROM Replace the FCU 2 23 JBIG compression or reconstruction error Turn off the machine then turn it back on 2 24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine then turn it back on 2 25 JBIG data reconstruction error BIH error 2 26 JBIG data reconstruction er...

Page 1049: ...to the machine 4 01 Line current was cut Check the line connector Check for line problems Replace the FCU 4 10 Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch Closed Network or Tel No CSI mismatch Protection against Wrong Connections Get the ID Codes the same and or the CSIs programmed correctly then resend The machine at the other end may be defective 5 10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU 5 ...

Page 1050: ... received within 18 s of CFR but there was no line fail Check the line connection Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal Replace the FCU Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error Defective FCU The other terminal may be defective 6 08 G3 ECM PIP PIN received in reply to PPS NULL The other end pressed Stop d...

Page 1051: ...the FCU 13 17 SIP user name registration error Double registration of the SIP user name Capacity for user name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient 13 18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server Defective SIP server 13 24 SIP authentication error Registered password in the device does not match the password in the SIP server 13 25 Network I F setting error I...

Page 1052: ...eck that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination 14 03 Access to SMTP Server Denied 450 Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check...

Page 1053: ...destination folder is located Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD 14 06 User Not Found on SMTP Server 551 The designated user does not exist ...

Page 1054: ...e transmission could not be completed Buffer is full due to using Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time 14 12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large 14 13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop 14 14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the defective so...

Page 1055: ...31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transmission HDD full or not operating correctly Software error 14 32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detected by NFAX Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due to a software error 14 33 No Mail Address For the Machine Neither the mail address of the machine nor th...

Page 1056: ...cation mail failed 14 62 Transmission Error due to the existence of zero line page When the 0 line page exists in received pages with G3 communication the transmission is interrupted 15 01 POP3 IMAP4 Server Not Registered At startup the system detected that the IP address of the POP3 IMAP4 server has not been registered in the machine 15 02 POP3 IMAP4 Mail Account Information Not Registered The PO...

Page 1057: ...s incorrect 15 15 Mail Divide Error The e mail is not in standard format There is no boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large 15 17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only because the network is not operating correctly 15 18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was rec...

Page 1058: ... TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supported Page size error The page size was larger than A3 Compression error File was compressed with other than MH MR or MMR 15 63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF he...

Page 1059: ...ould not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 15 81 Repeated Destination Registration Error Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 15 91 Send Regis...

Page 1060: ...emory overflow while receiving Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine if the machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk 22 02 Tx or rx job stalled due to line disconnection at the other end The job started normally but did not finish normally data m...

Page 1061: ... C2530 Code Meaning Suggested Cause Action transmission error occurred F0 xx V 34 modem error Replace the FCU F6 xx SG3 modem error Update the SG3 modem ROM Replace the SG3 board Check for line noise or other line problems Try communicating another V 8 V 34 fax ...

Page 1062: ...rties in the network setup correct Check the IP address with the administrator of the network 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine At the MS DOS prompt type ping then the IP address of the machine then press Enter Between IFAX and PC 3 LAN settings in the machine Check the LAN parameters Check if there is an IP address conflict with oth...

Page 1063: ...e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully 1 E mail account on the Server Make sure that the PC can log into the e mail server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check Between e mail server and internet 2 E mail server Ma...

Page 1064: ...spaces 4 Router settings Use the ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 5 Error message by e mail from the network of the destination Check whether e mail can be sent to another address on the same network using the application e mail software Check the error e mail message Infor...

Page 1065: ...nually Manual sending not supported 5 IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote...

Page 1066: ...act the network administrator 5 Is the IP address host name of the specified Gateway correct Check the IP address host name 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9 IP address of local fax registered Register the I...

Page 1067: ... Firewall NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 4 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 5 Gatekeeper installed correctly Contact the network administrator 6 Gatekeeper power switched on Contact the network administrator 7 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct Check the IP address host name 8 DNS server registered when Gatekeep...

Page 1068: ...transmission baud rate IPFAX SW 05 16 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION Cannot receive via IP Address Host Name Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 IP address of local fax registered...

Page 1069: ...ive by VoIP Gateway Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly Contact the network administrator 4 VoIP Gateway power switched on Contact the network administrator 5 IP address host name of specified VoIP Gate...

Page 1070: ...en the sender fax is a Ricoh model 4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 5 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct on the sender s side Request the sender to check the IP address host name The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 6 DNS server reg...

Page 1071: ...red Register the Alias number Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth 10 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX SW06 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error ...

Page 1072: ... press the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The main power LED C lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data ...

Page 1073: ...s for internet fax settings for the fax option Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Bit Switches Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option Bit Switches G3 1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board Bit...

Page 1074: ... 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board NCU Parameters 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 3 Mode No Function Service Station 101 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station Serial Number 102 000 Enter the fax unit s serial number PSTN 1 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3 1 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PAB...

Page 1075: ...keeper port number 005 T 38 Port Sets the T 38 port number 006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number 107 007 IPFAX Protocol Priority Select H323 or SIP FAX SW 201 001 032 00 1F 4 2 4 SP4 XXX ROM VERSIONS 4 Mode No Function 101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version 102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes 103 001 G3 1 ROM Version Displays the G3 1 modem version 4 2 5...

Page 1076: ...er data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory Initialize All Bit Switches 105 000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings Initialize Security Bit Switches 106 000 Initializes only the security bit switches If you select automatic output display for the user parameter switches the security settings are initialized 4 2 6 SP6 XXX REPORTS 6 Mode No Function System Parameter List 101 000 Touc...

Page 1077: ... all the user files in the SAF memory including confidential messages Do not use this function unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report 106 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the spe...

Page 1078: ...cations for the IP fax line 108 002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the IP fax line 4 2 7 SP7 XXX TESTS These are the test modes for PTT approval 7 Function 101 G3 1 Modem Tests 102 G3 1 DTMF Tests 103 Ringer Test 104 G3 1 V34 S2400baud 105 G3 1 V34 S2800baud 106 G3 1 V34 S3000baud 107 G3 1 V34 S3200baud 108 G3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test ...

Page 1079: ... are for use only in other areas such as Japan Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine 4 3 1 SYSTEM SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No 1 101 001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Dedicated transmission parameter programming 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters Reset this bit ...

Page 1080: ...ion 8 Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non ECM reception EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and ECM reception records 2 Rx level calculation Example 0000 32 V34 288 264 L 01 00 03 04 The four digit hexadecimal value N after L indicates the rx level The high byte is given first followed by the l...

Page 1081: ...e communication 7 Not used Do not change the setting System Switch 01 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 02 SP No 1 101 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Not used Do not change these settings 2 Force after transmission stall 0 Off 1 On With this setting on the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job 3 Not used Do not change these...

Page 1082: ...gth of time that RDS is temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable 00 99 hours BCD This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable The default setting is 24 hours System Switch 04 SP No 1 101 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 Printing dedicated tx parameters on Quick Speed Dia...

Page 1083: ...ol are listed on the Journal This will include telephone calls 2 Automatic error report printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Error reports will not be printed 1 Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications 3 Printing of the error code on the error report 0 No 1 Yes 1 Error codes are printed on the error reports 4 Not used Do not change this setting 5 Power failure report 0 Di...

Page 1084: ...rt is not used 1 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Dialing on the ten key pad when the external telephone is off hook 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Prevents dialing from the ten key pad while the external telephone is off hook Use this setting when the external telephone is not by the machine or if a wireless telephone is connected as an external telephone 1 The user can dial on the machine s ten...

Page 1085: ...rx are possible while the external handset is off hook However memory tx is not possible 1 The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 0F SP No 1 101 016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Country area ...

Page 1086: ...SA 24 Poland System Switch 10 SP No 1 101 017 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission Threshold N x 128 KB 256 KB N can be between 00 FF H Default setting 02 H 512 KB System Switch 11 SP No 1 101 018 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TTI printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints ...

Page 1087: ...the print start position for the TTI from the left edge of the paper If the TTI is moved too far to the right it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page On an A4 page if the TTI is moved over by more than 50 mm it may overwrite the page number System Switch 13 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 14 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 15 S...

Page 1088: ...ting the file if there is no file waiting for transmission the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode 6 7 Not used Do not change System Switch 16 SP No 1 101 023 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 17 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 18 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 19 SP No 1 101 026 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 6 Not used...

Page 1089: ...stem Switch 1C Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1D SP No 1 101 030 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 RTI CSI CPS code display 0 ON 1 OFF 0 RTI CSI CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD panel during communication 1 Codes are switched off no display 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 1E SP No 1 101 031 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Communication after the Journal d...

Page 1090: ...gnored for parallel memory transmission 2 RTI CSI display priority 0 RTI 1 CSI This bit determines which identifier RTI or CSI is displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non standard mode 3 File No printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 File numbers are not printed on any reports 4 Action when authorized reception is enabled but authorized RTIs CSIs are not yet programmed 0 All fax ...

Page 1091: ...ge report Parallel memory tx Transmission result report 2 Not used Do not change the settings 3 Received fax print start timing G3 reception 0 After receiving each page 1 After receiving all pages 0 The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it 1 The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory 4 6 Not used Do not change the fa...

Page 1092: ... the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities original width setting of the receiving machine The original width selected with this switch is used as the RX machine s original width setting and the original is reduced to this size before sending The default is A4 If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept the machine detects...

Page 1093: ... mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Off 0 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned in mm are sent in mm Images received in inches are transmitted in inches Images received in mm are transmitted in mm When this switch is On 1 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned in mm are converted to inches Images received in inches are tra...

Page 1094: ... normally at the destination 2 3 00 Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part Disposition Automatic action MDN send automatically dispatched The dispatched string is included in the Subject string 01 Displayed Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with displayed in the 2nd part Di...

Page 1095: ...04 SP No 1 102 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Subject for Delivery TX Memory Transfer 0 This setting determines whether the RTI CSI registered on this machine or the RTI CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents 0 Puts the RTI CSI of the originator in the Subject line If this is used either the RTI or CSI is used Only one of these can be received for use in the subject ...

Page 1096: ... Used I fax Switch 05 SP No 1 102 006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients 0 Determines whether the e mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal For example 1st destination Total number of destinations 9 in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations 0 Not recorded 1 Recorded 1 I Fax ...

Page 1097: ...r 00 FF 0 to 1024 KB HEX The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory I fax Switch 09 SP No 1 102 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails due to errors 01 F 1 15 Hex I fax Switch 0A Not used do not change the settings SP N...

Page 1098: ...etermines whether an e mail via SMTP is encrypted 0 Not encrypted 1 Encrypted 3 7 Not used 4 3 3 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 SP No 1 103 001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Select page separation marks 0 Off 1 On 0 If a 2 page RX transmission is split is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page 1 If a 2 page RX transmission ...

Page 1099: ...bled 1 The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 01 SP No 1 103 002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 2 Not used Do not change the settings 3 4 Maximum print width used in the setup protocol Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Not used Bit 4 0 Bit 3 1 A3 Bit 4 1 Bit 3 0 B4 Bit 4 1 Bit 3 1 A4 These bits are only effective w...

Page 1100: ...usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports 1 The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F 15 or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection feature 4 7 Not used Do not change the ...

Page 1101: ...s 10 mm or less longer than A4 then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4 then the document is split into 2 pages Printer Switch 04 SP No 1 103 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03 0 above Maximum reducible length Paper length N x 5mm N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits...

Page 1102: ... Printing will not start 1 Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper based on the paper size selection priority tables Cross reference Just size printing on off User switch 05 bit 5 1 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 07 SP No 1 103 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Repo...

Page 1103: ...election priority 0 Width 1 Length 0 A paper size that has the same width as the received data is selected first 1 A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first 1 Paper size selected for printing A4 width fax data 0 8 5 x 11 size 1 A4 size This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data when the machine h...

Page 1104: ...has taken place all the pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio 1 Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place Other pages are printed without reduction Printer Switch 0F SP No 1 103 016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Smoothing feature Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 Disabled Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 Disabled Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 Enabled Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used 0 0 0 1 Di...

Page 1105: ...Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 MH only Bit 3 0 Bit 2 1 MH MR Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 MH MR MMR Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 MH MR MMR JBIG These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 JBIG compression method Reception 0 Only basic supported 1 Basic and...

Page 1106: ...ceived CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number This does not work when manually dialed 1 0 The same as above except that only the last 4 digits are compared 1 1 The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message if the other end does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI 0 0 Nothing is checked transmission will always go ahead This function does not work ...

Page 1107: ...atio 0 5 1 10 If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable ratio RTN will be sent to the other end 2 Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0 Deleted from memory without printing 1 Printed 0 Pages received with errors are not printed 3 Hang up decision when a negative code RTN or PIN is received during G3 immediate transmission 0 No hang up 1 Hang up 0 The next pa...

Page 1108: ...ings Communication Switch 09 SP No 1 104 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 IP Fax dial interval setting Adjusts the interval of the I fax dialing The interval of I fax dialing is calculated by following formula Interval time specified value with this switch x 0 2 msec Communication Switch 0A SP No 1 104 011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing 0 From the erro...

Page 1109: ... to FF Hex unit 4 kbytes e g 06 H 24 kbytes One page is about 24 kbytes The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold the machine cannot receive any fax messages If this setting is kept at 0 the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available This will result in communication ...

Page 1110: ...Communication Switch 13 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 14 SP No 1 104 021 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Inch to mm conversion during transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 In immediate transmission data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion In memory transmission data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion Note When storing the ...

Page 1111: ...exchange in the DIS NSF frames Communication Switch 15 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 16 SP No 1 104 023 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Not used Do not change the factory settings Communication Switch 17 SP No 1 104 024 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 SEP reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Polling transmission to another maker s machine using the SEP Selective Polling signal is disabled 1...

Page 1112: ...ber IP Fax dial in number is 4 digit number 6 7 Not used Do not change the factory settings Communication Switch 19 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1A Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1B SP No 1 104 028 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Extension access code 0 to 7 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off If the PABX does not support V 8 V 34 protocol procedur...

Page 1113: ...t used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1F Not used do not change the settings 4 3 5 G3 SWITCHES G3 Switch 00 SP No 1 105 001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Monitor speaker during communication tx and rx Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 Disabled Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 Up to Phase B Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 All the time Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The moni...

Page 1114: ...ms with PC based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 Forbid CED AMsam output 0 Off 1 On Forbid output Do not change this setting Default 0 Off unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non sta...

Page 1115: ...cations will not be possible Note Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14 4 kbps or lower 3 ECM frame size 0 256 bytes 1 64 bytes Keep this bit at 0 in most cases 4 CTC transmission conditions 0 After one PPR signal received 1 After four PPR signals received ITU T standard 0 When using ECM in non standard NSF NSS mode the machine sends a CTC ...

Page 1116: ...hange the settings 7 Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0 Off 1 On This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line applied to PSTN G3 ringing Do not change this setting 0 No detection Outside Japan 1 Detection Inside Japan only G3 Switch 04 SP No 1 105 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 3 Training error detection threshold 0 F Hex 0 15 bits If the number of error ...

Page 1117: ... 0 33 6k 0 3 Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 4 5 Initial modem type for 9 6 k or 7 2 kbps Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 V 2...

Page 1118: ... 1 0 1 0 24 0k 1 0 1 1 26 4k 1 1 0 0 28 8k 1 1 0 1 31 2k 1 1 1 0 33 6k 0 3 Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 Modem types available for recep...

Page 1119: ... Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 Medium Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 High Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This se...

Page 1120: ... parameter 1 Specific parameter 0 This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection 1 This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM 69ECBEH 69ECDEH Select this if the dial tone cannot be detected when the Normal parameter 0 is selected 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0...

Page 1121: ...ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if error code 0 21 is frequent 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0 6 s 1 12 s When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data and sends CFR This is outside the T 30 recommendation But if t...

Page 1122: ...0 Alarm when an error occurred in Phase C or later 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error communication change this bit to 1 1 Alarm when the handset is off hook at the end of communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off hook at the end of fax communication change this bit to 1 2 Not used Do not change the set...

Page 1123: ...mmunication via the gatekeeper for IP Fax 5 IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 0 LSB first 1 MSB first Reverses the T30 bit signal 6 IP Fax max bit rate setting 0 Not affected 1 Affected When 0 is selected the max bit rate does not affect the value of the DIS DCS When 1 is selected the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS DCS 7 IP Fax received telephone number confirmation 0 No confirmation 1 Conf...

Page 1124: ...4 Redundant packets 4 7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time 00 to 0f There are 16 values in this 4 bit binary switch combination Waiting time set value level x 100 ms Max 0f 1500 ms Min 00 No wait time The default is 0000 00H IP Fax Switch 02 SP No 1 111 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting 0 Maker code setting 1 Internal bit switch setting When...

Page 1125: ... message from the SIP server not registered for the machine and send a refusal message 5 ECM communication setting 0 No limit for image compression 1 Limit for image compression 0 This does not limit the type of the image compression with ECM communication 1 When the other end machine is Ciscco this permits the image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM communication 6 7 Not used Do not cha...

Page 1126: ...ected the transmission condition is based on the ITU T method 6 Shift down setting at receiving negative code 0 OFF 1 ON Selects whether to shift down when negative codes are received 7 Not used Do not change this setting IP Fax Switch 04 SP No 1 111 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level 00 to 0f The default is 1111 0fH 4 7 Not used Do not change t...

Page 1127: ...mission The default is 00 V29 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 V29 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 1 V17 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 V34 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 Not used V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 06 SP No 1 111 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 1 2400 b...

Page 1128: ... V34 4 7 V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication IP Fax Switch 07 SP No 1 111 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TSI information 0 Not added 1 Added Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS S 1 DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout 2 Not used Do not change this setting 3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled 0 N...

Page 1129: ...1 timer The default is 00 35 seconds Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 35 sec Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 40 sec Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 50 sec Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 60 sec 2 3 T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer The default is 00 3 seconds Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 3 sec Bit 3 0 Bit 2 1 3 5 sec Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 4 sec Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 5 sec 4 5 T0 timer adjustment Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 75 sec Bit 5 0 Bit 4 1 120 sec Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 180 sec Bit 5 1 Bit 4 ...

Page 1130: ...tting as SIP server connection 1 Automatic setting 0 The I F setting for fax communication follows the setting for SIP server connection 1 The negotiation between the SIP server and the device decides whether IPv4 or IPv6 is used for the I F setting for fax communication 2 Record route setting 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disables the record route function of the SIP server 1 Enables the record route func...

Page 1131: ...Unit column The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 e g 680700 for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit Address Function Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this ...

Page 1132: ...s disabled Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is dis...

Page 1133: ...or silent period after ring back tone detected LOW 20 ms 680512 PSTN detection time for silent period after ring back tone detected HIGH 20 ms 680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit high byte 680516 PSTN busy tone frequency...

Page 1134: ...ins FF the machine pauses for the pause time 680520 680521 680520 PABX wait interval LOW 680521 PABX wait interval HIGH 20 ms 680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms 680523 PABX ringback tone off detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680524 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected LOW 20 ms 680525 PABX detection time for sil...

Page 1135: ...80530 Busy tone ON time range 4 680531 Busy tone OFF time range 4 680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection time 20 ms 680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges and number of cycles required for detection a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 75 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 50 Bits 2 and...

Page 1136: ...3B International dial tone continuous tone time 68053C International dial tone permissible drop time If 680538 contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 68053D 68053E Belgium See Note 2 68053D International dial wait interval LOW 68053E International dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68053F Country dial tone upper frequency limit HIGH 680540 Country dial tone upper frequency limit LOW If both ...

Page 1137: ...ait interval LOW 680549 Country dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68054A Time between opening or closing the DO relay and opening the OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 012 parameter 11 68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 013 parameter 12 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 014 parameter 13 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO rela...

Page 1138: ... between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals dBm x 0 5 SP2 103 021 parameter 20 The setting must be less than 5dBm and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above See Note 5 680554 PSTN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 022 parameter 21 See Note 5 680556 Not used Do not change the settings 680557 Time between 68054Dh NCU parameter 14 and 6...

Page 1139: ... code If this address contains FF H the pause time stored in address 68054F is used Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK 68055E Progress tone detection level and cadence detection enable flags Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 25 0 dBm Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 35 0 dBm Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 30 0 dBm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 40 0 dBm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 49 0 dBm Bits 2 0 See Note 2 68055F To 680564 ...

Page 1140: ...a call is detected 1 SP2 103 007 parameter 06 The setting must not be zero 680577 Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms See Note 4 SP2 103 008 parameter 07 680578 Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings 20 ms SP2 103 009 parameter 08 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time LOW SP2 103 010 parameter 09 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time HIGH 20 ms SP2 103 011...

Page 1141: ...ncy upper limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms 20 ms Factory setting 200 ms 6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit hig...

Page 1142: ...er limit high byte 6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detectio...

Page 1143: ...B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD Modem turn on level incoming signal detection level 37 0 5N dBm 6805BE to 6805C6 Not used Do not change the settings 6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 V 34 protocol dump 0 Simple 1 Detailed default Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6805C8 to 6805D9 Not used Do not change the settings 6805DA T 30 T1 timer 1 s 6805E0 bit 3 Maximum wait time for post message 0 12 s 1 30 s 1 Maximum wait t...

Page 1144: ...1 1 1 1 41 25 V Do not change these settings 0 RT 0 Low Bit 1 1 RT 1 High 0 RZ 0 High 6805E4 Bit 1 sets the level of the call signal Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance Bit 3 1 RZ 1 Composite 0 Auto Bit 0 1 Fixed 0 Use RDTP Bit 0 sets the ring detection method Bit 1 sets the ring detection method when fixed Bit 1 1 Use RDTN Here is a summary of the voltages for the detection of off hook for DP de...

Page 1145: ...r off state duration and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit 0 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit 0 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit 20 ms 3 Pulse dial parameters addresses 68054A to 68054F are the values for 10 pps If 20 pps is used the machine automatically compensates 4 The first ring may not be detected unt...

Page 1146: ...Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A 68054D and 68054E ...

Page 1147: ...the address book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 5 The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 6 To scroll through the parameter switches either 7 Select the next switch press Next or Select the previous s...

Page 1148: ...unications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Do not use settings other than listed on the left 5 7 Cable equalizer Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 None Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 Low Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 Medium Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 High Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Disabled Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher fr...

Page 1149: ...used 0 0 0 1 2400 0 0 1 0 4800 0 0 1 1 7200 0 1 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 12000 0 1 1 0 14400 0 1 1 1 16800 1 0 0 0 19200 1 0 0 1 21600 1 0 1 0 24000 1 0 1 1 26400 1 1 0 0 28800 0 3 1 1 0 1 31200 If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long the initial modem rate may be too high Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits For the settings 14 4 or kbps slower Switch 04 bit 4 mus...

Page 1150: ...t 3 0 Bit 2 1 Second DIS or NSF Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 Not used Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 Disabled 0 1 Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set up protocol at the start of transmission The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 4 V 8 protocol 0 Off 1 Disabled If transmissions to a specific desti...

Page 1151: ...Not used do not change the settings Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings E mail Parameters The initial settings of the following e mail parameters are all 0 all parameters disabled Switch 00 No FUNCTION COMM...

Page 1152: ...e selections of Bits 00 01 02 Switch 01 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Original width of e mail attachment A4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A4 1 Original width of e mail attachment B4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as B4 2 Original width of e mail attachment A3 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A3 3 6 Not used Do no...

Page 1153: ... e mail attachment 200 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 400 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Line resolution of e mail attachment 400 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 5 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit ...

Page 1154: ...onfirmation to a message when transmitting This machine updates the reception capability to the address book when receiving 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 05 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Directr transmission selection to SMTP server 0 ON 1 OFF Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP server 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the s...

Page 1155: ...09F H G3 2 bit switches Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches Not used 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies This switch is not printed on the user parameter list ...

Page 1156: ...ple image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 The machine receives all the fax messages Bit 2 0 Bit 1 1 The machine receives the fax messa...

Page 1157: ...t 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 White original detection 0 Off 1 On alarm and alert message on the LCD Bit 3 Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0 Off receive 1 On not receive Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DC H User parameter switch 12 SWUSR_0C Not used...

Page 1158: ...4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available 0 A3 has priority 1 B4 has priority Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E1 H User parameter switch 17 SWUSR_11 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Broadcasting 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2 Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick Speed dials is selected for broadcasting 0 Not needed 1 Needed Bits 3 5 and 6 Not used Bit 4 Display Destination Prior to Transm...

Page 1159: ... is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 min 0 0 0 1 1 min 1 1 1 0 14 min 1 1 1 1 15 min Bits 6 and 7 Not us...

Page 1160: ...ble for the limit specified by system switch 03 This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user see system switch 02 Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6800EA H 6800EB H User parameter switches 26 27 SWUSR_1A 1B Not used 6800EC H User parameter switch 28 SWUSR_1C Xxxxx 6800ED H User parameter switch 29 SWUSR_1D xxxxxx 6800EE H and 6800EF H User parameter switches 30 and 31 SWUSR_1E and...

Page 1161: ...criber number ISDN G4 Not used 680208 to 68021B H PSTN 1 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII See the following note 68021C to 68022F H PSTN 2 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680230 to 680246 H PSTN 3 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680247 to 680286 H TTI 1 Max 64 characters ASCII See the following note 680287 to 6802C6 H TTI 2 Max 64 characters ASCII Not used 6802C7 to 680306 H TTI 3 Max 64 char...

Page 1162: ... Read only 680406 H Suffix BCD 680407 H Version BCD 680408 H Year BCD 680409 H Month BCD 68040A H Day BCD 68040B to 68040F Option G3 board G3 3 ROM information Read only 68040B H Suffix BCD 68040C H Version BCD 68040D H Year BCD 68040E H Month BCD 68040F H Day BCD 680410 H G3 1 Modem ROM version Read only 680412 H G3 2 Modem ROM version Read only 680414 H G3 3 Modem ROM version Read only 680420 H ...

Page 1163: ... Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD8 H H 323 function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD9 H SIP digest authentication function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFDA H IP Fax backup data 00 600 H Not used 69ED6A H to 69ED92 H SIP server address Read only 69ED6A H Proxy server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69ED72 H Proxy server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69ED7A H Redirect server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69ED82 H Redirec...

Page 1164: ...ime 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 64 ASIA 64 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time 20 ms Defaults Area 6BEC03 6BEC04 NA F4 01 EU F4 01 ASIA F4 01 6BEC05 H Dial tone detect judge time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 1B ASIA 32 6BEC06 H Dial tone disconnect permission time 20 ms Defaults NA 11 EU 0F ASIA 11 ...

Page 1165: ...97 mm 11 7 ins ARDF Face up Single sided document Length 128 1200 mm 5 0 47 2 ins Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Double sided document Length 128 432 mm 5 0 17 inch Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD Resolution G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine See Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 1 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 d...

Page 1166: ... 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback I O Rate With ECM 0 ms line Without ECM 2 5 5 10 20 or 40 ms line Memory Capacity ECM 128 KB SAF Standard 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory 28 MB Page Memory Standard 8 MB Print 4 MB Scanner 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory 16 MB Print 8 MB Scanner 8 MB 5 1 2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS The following table shows the capabilities o...

Page 1167: ...document memory will change after the Expansion Memory are installed Without the Expansion Memory With the Expansion Memory D432 D433 D432 D433 Memory Transmission file 400 200 400 Memory capacity for memory transmission See the Note below 320 320 2240 Measured using an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at standard resolution auto image density mode and Text mode ...

Page 1168: ... the server Condition ITU T 1 test document Selerexe Letter MTF correction OFF TTI None Resolution 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4 LT To use B4 and A3 width IFAX SW00 Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 A3 must be set to 1 E mail File Format Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH ...

Page 1169: ...550 C2530 Authentication Method SMTP AUTH POP before SMTP A POP Remark The machine must be set up as an e mail client before installation Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e mail clients or some features will not work e g Autorouting ...

Page 1170: ...l size Maximum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission function Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the pu...

Page 1171: ...433 Fax Option Type C2550 C2530 5 4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION Component Code No Remarks MBU 3 GWFCU 2 Speaker D432 D433 1 Included with the fax unit Expansion Memory G578 4 Optional only for D432 Handset Type 1018 B433 NA only Also used with AT AP C2 ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP C2030

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP C2030

Brands by name

Popular brands

Ricoh Aficio MP C2030, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP C2030

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP C2030

Brands by name

Popular brands